Catalog Baker

D E L I V E R I N G
PERFORMANCE
PACKER SYSTEMS
Baker Oil Tools

Baker Oil Tools
INTRODUCTION
Baker Oil Tools is the company operators turn to first - and most often - for reliable, performance-based perma-
nent and retrievable packer systems. Since 1940, when we introduced the industry's first completion packer,
Baker Oil Tools has set the standard for innovation and performance in packer technology. The “Baker Retainer
Production Packer” was the first tool to dependably isolate and produce two oil zones simultaneously. In 1955,
we introduced the world's first retrievable production packer, the “Baker Full-Bore Retrievable Set-Down Pack-
er,” which proved key to exploiting oil reserves in the Gulf of Mexico. Today, as the industry pushes the edge of
the completion technology envelope, operators select Baker Oil Tools packers to obtain best-in-class service,
performance, and value.
The breadth of our packer product offering allows Baker Oil Tools to provide a complete range of fit-for-purpose
completions for all types of well environments. Baker offers packer solutions for the entire spectrum of applica-
tions, from single, selective and dual completions, to advanced-technology completions such as HP/HT, deep-
water, extended-reach, multilateral, and Intelligent Completions.
Baker Oil Tools has the depth of experience in sales, operations, engineering, and manufacturing to be trusted
to meet today's completion demands. A network of over 140 sales and service locations insures personalized
service throughout the world. State of the art research and engineering centers in both Houston and Aberdeen,
and manufacturing centers in the USA, UK, Singapore, and Venezuela deliver performance-based quality prod-
ucts.
Baker Oil Tools: People and products providing solutions for completions, workovers, and fishing.
1
Baker Oil Tools ALPHABETICAL PRODUCT INDEX
Accessories Selection Chart ............................................. 111 Model AR-1™ Snap-Set Compression Packer
Adjustable Spacer Sub with Rotational Lock .................... 134 With And Without Hold-Down ........................................... 80
Alphabetical Product Index ................................................... 2 Model A™ Full Opening Parallel Flow Tube...................... 139
Anchor Tubing Seal Assembly .......................................... 120 Model A™ Full Opening Anchor Parallel Flow Tube ......... 139
Baker Modified .................................................................. 150 Model A™ Parallel Anchor Seal Nipple ............................. 139
Baker Modified Metal Free ................................................ 150 Model A™ Positioning Tool ............................................... 132
BAKERLOK™ Thread-locking Compound ........................ 150 Model A™ Retrieva-D and Model A Retrieva-DB

Bakerseal Thread Sealing Compound ........................... 150
Lok-Set Retrievable Casing Packers................................ 88
Model A™, AH™, A-1™, and AH-1™ Extenda-Joint™..... 127
Blank and Chamfered Bottom Sub.................................... 123
Model BH™ and BHH™ Setting Tool................................ 115
Blast Joint.......................................................................... 147
Model B™ and C™ Expendable Plug ............................... 141
Casing Scraper ................................................................. 112
Model B™ and D™ Two Way Downhole Shut-off Valve ... 129
CO2 Injection And Waterflood Completions ........................ 32
Model B™ Guide ............................................................... 146
Coil Tubing Deployed ESPCP System For
High-GOR Applications .................................................... 37 Model B™ Shear-Out Safety Joint .................................... 138
Completion Design / Ordering Information ............................ 7 Model C-1™ Single Grip Invertible Packer.......................... 72
Downhole Sealing Systems .............................................. 118 Model C™ Rotationally Locked Shear-Out Safety Joint.... 138
Elastomer Selection .............................................................. 9 Model C™ Tubing Testing Sub ......................................... 142
ESP With Downhole Oil Water Separation ......................... 36 Model DA™ and DAB™ Retainer Production Packer ......... 52
Expansion Joint Selection Guide ...................................... 131 Model D-ESP™ Electric Submersible Pump Packer ......... 102
Extended Reach Completion .............................................. 27 Model DR™ Latching-Type Packer Plug ........................... 140
Flow Coupling ................................................................... 147 Model DR™ Locator Type Packer Plug............................. 140
Formula B™ Tubing Seal Grease ..................................... 150 Model D™ and DB™ Retainer Production Packer .............. 50
Fracturing / Stimulation Completion .................................... 14 Model E-4™ Wireline Pressure Setting Assembly ............ 113
Fracturing Requiring Zone Isolation Completion ................. 15 Model E™ and EC™ Anchor Tubing Seal Assembly ........ 120
Full Bore Isolation Valve ................................................... 143 Model E™ Hydro-Trip Sub ................................................ 142
Half Mule Shoe Bottom Sub .............................................. 123 Model E™ Snap-Latch Seal Assembly.............................. 121
High Pressure Dual String Completion ............................... 23 Model E™ Tubing Expansion Joint ................................... 131
High Pressure High Temperature Completion .................... 30 Model E™ Tubing Seal Nipple .......................................... 122
Hydraulic and Hydrostatic Setting Module And Adapter Model E™, K™, and N™ Latch-in Shear Release
Kit For The TorqueMaster™ Whipstock Packer............... 68 Anchor Tubing Seal Assembly ....................................... 121
Hydraulic Punch Releasable Anchor................................. 121 Model F-1™ and FB-1™ Retainer Production Packer ........ 54
Hydraulic Set Packer Completion ....................................... 16 Model FA™, FAB™, FA-1™ and FAB-1™
Retainer Production Packer.............................................. 56
Intelligent Well System ........................................................ 38
Model FB-3™ High Pressure Retainer Production Packer.. 58
Introduction ........................................................................... 1
Model FHS™ and FHSL™ Hydrostatic Set Single
Level 1 Multilateral Systems ............................................... 41
String Retrievable Packer................................................. 84
Level 2 Multilateral Systems ............................................... 41
Model FH™ and FHL™ Hydrostatic Set Single
Level 3 Multilateral Systems ............................................... 42 String Retrievable Packer................................................. 84
Level 4 Multilateral Systems ............................................... 43 Model FLX™ Pack-Off Tubing Hanger.............................. 107
Level 5 Multilateral Systems ............................................... 44 Model F™ Latching-Type Packer Plug .............................. 140
Level 6 Multilateral Systems ............................................... 45 Model F™ Parallel Locator Seal Nipple............................. 139
Level 6 Multilateral Systems ............................................... 46 Model F™ Parallel Snap-Latch Seal Nipple ...................... 139
Locator Tubing Seal Assembly ......................................... 118 Model GT™ and GT-S™ Dual String
Material Selection.................................................................. 8 Retrievable Packer ......................................................... 104
Millout Extension ............................................................... 146 Model G™ Locator Tubing Seal Assembly........................ 118
Model A-3™ and AL-2™ Lok-Set Model G™ Locator Tubing Seal Assembly
Retrievable Casing Packer............................................... 76 With Spacer Tube........................................................... 119
Model A-5™ Dual String Retrievable Packer ...................... 95 Model G™ Retrievable Casing Packer................................ 72
Model AD-1™ and ADL-1™ Tension Packer ...................... 70 Model HE™ and HEA™ Retainer Production Packer ......... 59
Model AL-5™ and ALS-5™ Dual String Model HP-1AH™ Packer..................................................... 87
Retrievable Packer........................................................... 95
2
ALPHABETICAL PRODUCT INDEX Baker Oil Tools
Model HS™ and HS-S™ Hydraulic Set Single Multizone Waterflood Injector Completion ........................... 33
String Retrievable Packer................................................. 82 One Trip Completion With Floating Seals............................ 19
Model H™ Wireline Feeler And Junk Catcher................... 112 One Trip Dual Completion ................................................... 24
APPLICATIONS
Model Iso-Pak Single String Hydraulic Packer.................... 92 One Trip Selective Dual Completion.................................... 25
Model J™ and B-2™ Hydraulic Setting Tool..................... 114 One Trip Single String Selective Completion....................... 22
Model J™ Single-Grip and J™ Snap-Set Optimized TLP Deepwater Completion ............................... 28
Double Grip Dual Packer.................................................. 98
Packer Performance Definition ............................................ 12
Model K™ Parallel Anchor Seal Nipple............................. 135
Packer Setting Valve Deepwater Completion...................... 26
Model K™ Single-Grip and K™ Snap-Set
Parallel Head ..................................................................... 135
Double Grip Dual Packer.................................................. 98
Perforated Spacer Tube .................................................... 147
Model K™, KC™, KC-1™, and KC-2™ Anchor
Tubing Seal Nipples ....................................................... 120 Permanent Packer Selection Chart ..................................... 49
Model K™, N™ Locator Tubing Seal Nipple ..................... 118 POWER Tool Premier™ Workstring Retrieving Tool......... 117
Model L-10™ and L-316™ On-Off Sealing Premier™ Removable Production Packer ......................... 109
PERMANENT PACKER
Connector Family ........................................................... 129 Product Number Index........................................................... 4
SYSTEMS
Model LEEJ™ Expansion Joint ......................................... 133 Production And Injection Completions................................. 13
Model L™ Expansion Joint................................................ 132 Ratcheting Muleshoe ......................................................... 123
Model L™ Hi-Temp Wireline Pressure Reliant Series Model M Mechanical Set
Setting Assembly............................................................ 113 Single String Retrievable Packer ...................................... 78
Model L™, LE™, and LM™ Locator Tubing Seal Reliant Series Model WL™ Wireline Set
Assembly With Spacer Tube .......................................... 119 Single String Retrievable Packer ...................................... 93
Model MJS™ Thermal Packer ............................................ 79 Retrievable Packer Bore Receptacle................................. 125
Model MR-1™ Single-Grip And Double-Grip Retrievable Packer Selection Chart..................................... 69
Snap-Set™ Packer........................................................... 80
Retrievable TorqueMaster™ Packer ................................. 108
Model M™ Anchor Tubing Seal Assembly........................ 120
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
Retrieva-D™, Retrieva-DB™, Retrieva-DA™,
Model M™ Expansion Joint............................................... 132 and Retrieva-DAB™ Lok-Set Retrievable Packers........... 88
SYSTEMS
Model N™ and NM™ Anchor Tubing Seal Assembly ....... 120 Safety Joint ........................................................................ 137
Model N™ Splined Expansion Joint .................................. 131 Safety Joint Selection Guide.............................................. 137
Model R-3™ Retrievable Casing Packer............................. 74 Seal Bore Extension .......................................................... 146
Model Retrieva-D™ Retrieving Tool.................................. 116 Seal Bore Packer / Plug Completion ................................... 18
Model RS™ Setting Nipple................................................ 141 Seal Bore Packer Completion.............................................. 17
Model S-1™ Retrieving Tool ............................................. 116 Seal Stacks........................................................................ 124
Model SAB-3™ and SABL-3™ Hydro-Set Seal Units .......................................................................... 122
Retainer Production Packer ............................................. 62
Selective Head................................................................... 136
Model SAB-4™ and SAB(L)-4™ Retainer
Shear-Out Safety Joint ...................................................... 137
Production Packer ............................................................ 66
Single Riser TLP Deepwater Completion ............................ 29
Model SB-3H™ Hydrostatic/Hydraulic
ACCESSORIES
Retainer Production Packer ............................................. 64 Single String Selective Completion...................................... 21
Model SB-3™ Hydro-Set Retainer Production Packer........ 60 Single Zone ESP Completion .............................................. 34
Model SBT™ And SAB(L)T™ No Downstroke Single Zone ESP With Wireline Access............................... 35
Hydraulic Set Retainer Production Packer ....................... 65 Single Zone Thermal Completion ........................................ 31
Model SC-2PAH™ Packer .................................................. 86 TAML Categorization ........................................................... 39
Model SC-2P™ Retrievable Packer .................................... 90 Telescoping Swivel Sub..................................................... 134
Model Snap-In/Snap-Out, Set Down Activated, The Multi-Cycle Tool.......................................................... 143
Shear Release Anchor ................................................... 122 Threaded Pin Down Bottom Sub ....................................... 123
Model Striker™ Interventionless Packer Setting System .. 149 TorqueMaster™ Packer, Anchor, and Removable Anchor.. 67
Model S™ Snap-Latch Seal Nipple................................... 135 TUBEMOVE™ Load Sheet.................................................. 10
Model S™ Unloading Sub ................................................. 145 Twin Seal™ Electric Submersible Pump Packer ............... 100
Model U-1™ Upstrain Unloading Sub ............................... 145 Well Environment Data For Material Recommendations..... 11
Mudline Tubing Hanger ..................................................... 106 Wireline Entry Guide With Pump Out Plug,
Multilateral Completion With - Intelligent Well System ........ 47 With Shear-out Ball Seat, And With Shear-out
Multiple Feed Through Packer Technology......................... 94 Ball Seat Sub .................................................................. 148
Multiple Zone Plug-Back Option Completion....................... 20
3
Baker Oil Tools PRODUCT NUMBER INDEX
Product Description Page Product Description Page

Family No. Family No.
H16105 Casing Scraper ............................................. 112 H41518 Hydraulic and Hydrostatic Setting Module
And Adapter Kit For The TorqueMaster™
H19950 BAKERLOK™ Thread-locking Compound ... 150
Whipstock Packer ........................................... 68
H40906 Model SB-3™ Hydro-Set Retainer
H41519 TorqueMaster™ Packer, Anchor,
Production Packer .......................................... 60
and Removable Anchor .................................. 67
H40907 Model SAB-3™ and SABL-3™
H41519 Hydraulic and Hydrostatic Setting Module
Hydro-Set Retainer Production Packer........... 62
And Adapter Kit For The TorqueMaster™
H40908 Model SAB-3™ and SABL-3™ Whipstock Packer ........................................... 68
Hydro-Set Retainer Production Packer........... 62
H41525 Model D™ and DB™ Retainer
H40916 Model SBT™ And SAB(L)T™ No Production Packer........................................... 50
Downstroke Hydraulic Set Retainer
H41526 Model DA™ and DAB™ Retainer
Production Packer........................................... 52
H40917 Model SBT™ And SAB(L)T™ No
H41574 Model J™ Hydraulic Setting Assembly ......... 114
Downstroke Hydraulic Set Retainer
Production Packer .......................................... 65 H41576 Model BH™ Setting Tool .............................. 115
H40918 Model SBT™ And SAB(L)T™ No H41577 Model BHH™ Setting Tool............................ 115
Downstroke Hydraulic Set Retainer H41581 Hydraulic and Hydrostatic Setting Module
Production Packer .......................................... 65 And Adapter Kit For The TorqueMaster™
H40921 Model SAB-4™ and SAB(L)-4™ Whipstock Packer ........................................... 68
Retainer Production Packer............................ 66 H41754 Model MJS™ Thermal Packer ........................ 79
H40923 Model SAB-4™ and SAB(L)-4™ H42003 Model G™ Retrievable Casing Packer ........... 72
Retainer Production Packer............................ 66
H42101 Model HE™ and HEA™ Retainer
H40932 Model SB-3H™ Hydrostatic/Hydraulic Production Packer........................................... 59
H42103 Model HE™ and HEA™ Retainer
H40933 Model Striker™ Interventionless Packer Production Packer........................................... 59
Setting System.............................................. 149
H43702 Model E-4™ Wireline Pressure
H41306 Model F-1™ and FB-1™ Setting Assembly .......................................... 113
H43712 Model L™ Hi-Temp Wireline Pressure
H41307 Model FA™, FAB™, FA-1™ and FAB-1™ Setting Assembly .......................................... 113
H43717 Model Striker™ Interventionless Packer
H41308 Model F-1™ and FB-1™ Setting System.............................................. 149
H43901 Model H™ Wireline Feeler And
H41309 Model FA™, FAB™, FA-1™ and FAB-1™ Junk Catcher................................................. 112
H44101 Safety Joint ................................................... 137
H41340 Model F-1™ and FB-1™
H44120 Telescoping Swivel Sub................................ 134
H44125 Adjustable Spacer Sub with
H41341 Model FA™, FAB™, FA-1™ and FAB-1™
Rotational Lock ............................................. 134
H44130 Shear-Out Safety Joint.................................. 137
H41350 Model FB-3™ High Pressure
Retainer Production Packer............................ 58 H44131 Model B™ Shear-Out Safety Joint................ 138
H41371 Model J™ Hydraulic Setting Tool ................. 114 H44132 Model C™ Rotationally Locked
Shear-Out Safety Joint .................................. 138
Production Packer .......................................... 52 H44145 Model E™ Tubing Expansion Joint............... 131
H41505 Model D™ and DB™ Retainer H44160 Model L™ Expansion Joint ........................... 132
Production Packer .......................................... 50 H44162 Model M™ Expansion Joint .......................... 132
H41508 Model DA™ and DAB™ Retainer H44163 Model N™ Splined Expansion Joint.............. 131
H44165 Model A™ Positioning Tool........................... 132
H41513 Model D™ and DB™ Retainer
Production Packer .......................................... 50 H44167 Model LEEJ™ Expansion Joint
(Non-Splined)................................................ 133
Production Packer .......................................... 52 H44168 Model LEEJ™ Expansion Joint (Splined) ..... 133
H41518 TorqueMaster™ Packer, Anchor, H44387 Model Snap-In/Snap-Out, Set Down

and Removable Anchor .................................. 67 Activated, Shear Release Anchor ................. 122
4
PRODUCT NUMBER INDEX Baker Oil Tools

H44457 Ratcheting Muleshoe.................................... 123 H64681 Reliant Series Model M Mechanical
APPLICATIONS
H44757 Hydraulic Punch Releasable Anchor ............ 121 Set Single String Retrievable Packer ............. 78
H45743 Perforated Spacer Tube ............................... 147 H64686 Model SC-2P™ Retrievable Packer ............... 90
H45750 Blast Joint..................................................... 147 H64687 Model SC-2PAH™ Packer ............................. 86
H46921 Wireline Entry Guide .................................... 148 H64710 Reliant Series Model WL™ Wireline
Set Single String Retrievable Packer
H46921 Wireline Entry Guide With Pump Out Plug ... 148 (Standard Service).......................................... 93
H48806 Model HP-1AH™ Packer................................ 87 H64711 Reliant Series Model WL™ Wireline
H48853 Model S-1™ Retrieving Tool ........................ 116 Set Single String Retrievable Packer
(NACE Service) .............................................. 93
H49926 Formula B™ Tubing Seal Grease ................ 150
H66501 Model DR™ Locator Type Packer Plug........ 140
H49940 Seal Bore Extension ..................................... 146
PERMANENT PACKER
H66503 Model DR™ Latching-Type Packer Plug...... 140
H49941 Millout Extension .......................................... 146
H66512 Model F™ Latching-Type Packer Plug......... 140
SYSTEMS
H59921 Model C™ Tubing Testing Sub .................... 142
H66540 Model B™ and C™ Expendable Plug .......... 141
H63521 Model MR-1™ Single-Grip And
Double-Grip Snap-Set™ Packer .................... 80 H66541 Model B™ and C™ Expendable Plug .......... 141
H63531 Model AR-1™ Snap-Set Compression H66548 Model RS™ Setting Nipple........................... 141
Packer With And Without Hold-Down............. 80 H67111 Model S™ Unloading Sub ............................ 145
H63621 Model MR-1™ Single-Grip And H67113 The Multi-Cycle Tool..................................... 143
Double-Grip Snap-Set™ Packer .................... 80
H67114 Full Bore Isolation Valve............................... 143
H63631 Model AR-1™ Snap-Set Compression
Packer With And Without Hold-Down............. 80 H67510 Model U-1™ Upstrain Unloading Sub .......... 145
H64101 Model R-3™ Retrievable Casing Packer H68319 Retrievable Packer Bore Receptacle............ 125
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
(Single Grip) (Not Shown) .............................. 74 H68353 Model A™, AH™, A-1™, and AH-1™
Extenda-Joint™ ............................................ 127
SYSTEMS
H64201 Model R-3™ Retrievable Casing Packer
(Double-Grip).................................................. 74 H68354 Model A™, AH™, A-1™, and AH-1™
H64501 Retrievable TorqueMaster™ Packer ............ 108 Extenda-Joint™ ............................................ 127
H64616 Retrieva-D™, Retrieva-DB™, H68357 Model A™, AH™, A-1™, and AH-1™
Retrieva-DA™, and Retrieva-DAB™ Extenda-Joint™ ............................................ 127
Lok-Set Retrievable Packers .......................... 88 H68358 Model A™, AH™, A-1™, and AH-1™
H64617 Model Retrieva-D™ Retrieving Tool............. 116 Extenda-Joint™ ............................................ 127
H64618 Retrieva-D™, Retrieva-DB™, Retrieva-DA™, H68410 Model B™ and D™ Two Way Downhole
and Retrieva-DAB™ Lok-Set Retrievable Shut-off Valve ............................................... 129
Packers .......................................................... 88 H68411 Model B™ and D™ Two Way Downhole
H64622 Retrieva-D™, Retrieva-DB™, Retrieva-DA™, Shut-off Valve ............................................... 129
and Retrieva-DAB™ Lok-Set Retrievable H68420 Model L-10™ and L-316™ On-Off
ACCESSORIES
Packers .......................................................... 88 Sealing Connector Family ............................ 129
H64625 Retrieva-D™, Retrieva-DB™, Retrieva-DA™, H68422 Model L-10™ and L-316™ On-Off
and Retrieva-DAB™ Lok-Set Retrievable Sealing Connector Family ............................ 129
Packers .......................................................... 88 H70001 Model A™ Full Opening Parallel Flow Tube
H64628 Model A-3™ and AL-2™ Lok-Set and Model A™ Full Opening Anchor
Retrievable Casing Packer ............................. 76 Parallel Flow Tube ........................................ 139
H64630 Model A-3™ and AL-2™ Lok-Set H70010 Model A™ Full Opening Parallel Flow
Retrievable Casing Packer ............................. 76 Tube and Model A™ Full Opening
H64675 Model A™ Retrieva-D and Model A Retrieva-DB Anchor Parallel Flow Tube ........................... 139
Lok-Set Retrievable Casing Packers.............. 88 H70032 Parallel Head ................................................ 135
H64676 Model A™ Retrieva-D and Model A Retrieva-DB H70202 Model F™ Parallel Locator Seal Nipple........ 139
Lok-Set Retrievable Casing Packers.............. 88 H70301 Model A™ Parallel Anchor Seal Nipple ........ 139
H64677 Model A™ Retrieva-D and Model A Retrieva-DB H70311 Model K™ Parallel Anchor Seal Nipple ........ 135
Lok-Set Retrievable Casing Packers.............. 88
H70701 Model F™ Parallel Snap-Latch Seal Nipple . 139
H64678 Model A™ Retrieva-D and Model A Retrieva-DB
Lok-Set Retrievable Casing Packers.............. 88 H70703 Model S™ Snap-Latch Seal Nipple .............. 135
5
Baker Oil Tools PRODUCT NUMBER INDEX

H70703 Model C Selective J-Lock Seat Nipple .......... 136 H78425 Model MFT Packer ......................................... 94
H73908 Model AD-1™ and ADL-1™ Tension Packer.. 70 H78460 Model HS™ and HS-S™ Hydraulic
H73912 Model AD-1™ and ADL-1™ Tension Packer.. 70 Set Single String Retrievable Packer ............. 82
H73930 Model C-1™ Single Grip Invertible Packer H78461 Model HS™ and HS-S™ Hydraulic
(Not Shown) .................................................... 72 Set Single String Retrievable Packer ............. 82
H75401 Model K™ Single-Grip and K™ Snap-Set H78463 Premier™ Removable Production Packer.... 109
Double Grip Dual Packer ................................ 98 H78464 POWER Tool Premier™
H75501 Model K™ Single-Grip and K™ Snap-Set Workstring Retrieving Tool ........................... 117
Double Grip Dual Packer ................................ 98 H78465 Model Striker™ Interventionless Packer
H75601 Model J™ Single-Grip and J™ Snap-Set Setting System ............................................. 149
Double Grip Dual Packer ................................ 98 H78509 Model GT™ and GT-S™ Dual String
H75701 Model J™ Single-Grip and J™ Snap-Set Retrievable Packer (Standard Service) ........ 104
Double Grip Dual Packer ................................ 98 H78510 Model GT™ and GT-S™ Dual String
H78108 Model FH™ and FHL™ Hydrostatic Retrievable Packer (NACE Service)............. 104
Set Single String Retrievable Packer .............. 84 H78515 Model GT™ and GT-S™ Dual String
H78110 Model FHS™ and FHSL™ Hydrostatic Retrievable Packer (Selevtive Set)............... 104
Set Single String Retrievable Packer .............. 84 H78540 Twin Seal™ Electric Submersible
H78120 Model FH™ and FHL™ Hydrostatic Set Pump Packer ................................................ 100
Single String Retrievable Packer .................... 84 H78560 Model D-ESP™ Electric Submersible
H78125 Model FHS™ and FHSL™ Hydrostatic Set Pump Packer ................................................ 102
Single String Retrievable Packer .................... 84 H79080 Model FLX™ Pack-Off Tubing Hanger......... 107
H78316 Model A-5™ Dual String Retrievable Packer .. 95 H79085 Model FLX™ Pack-Off Tubing Hanger......... 107
H78330 Model A-5™ Dual String Retrievable Packer .. 95 H79101 Mudline Tubing Hanger ................................ 106
H78330 Model AL-5™ and ALS-5™ Dual String H79927 Wireline Entry Guide With Shear-Out
Retrievable Packer.......................................... 95 Ball Seat Sub................................................ 148
H78331 Model A-5™ Dual String Retrievable Packer .. 95 H79928 Model E™ Hydro-Trip Sub ........................... 142
H78331 Model AL-5™ and ALS-5™ Dual String H81920 Flow Coupling............................................... 147
Retrievable Packer.......................................... 95 H89920 Bakerseal
 Thread Sealing Compound ...... 150
H78351 Selective Head .............................................. 136 H89934 Baker Modified.............................................. 150
H78415 Model Iso-Pak Single String H89991 Baker Modified Metal Free ........................... 150
Hydraulic Packer ............................................. 92
6
Baker Oil Tools
COMPLETION DESIGN / ORDERING INFORMATION

The equipment used to complete oil and gas wells is as varied and complex as the wells themselves. The pack-
ers and ancillary equipment as well as the flow control, safety systems and tubulars are all part of a system that
must work as a unit throughout the life of the well. When ordering packers and ancillary equipment, many factors
must be considered, including the well type, procedures, geometry, and materials. Operational and life of well
activities must also be considered.
Baker Oil Tools' expertise in packer technology extends worldwide through an extensive network of highly
trained engineers, technical sales, and field personnel. At their disposal are years of well completion experience,
up-to-date product and material data, engineering and test facilities, and a host of computer programs to model
wellbore conditions. They can assist in selection of the equipment to best fit the application and your needs. The
following pages describe the required information needed to assist you in designing your next completion.
OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS
The major consideration when selecting completion equipment is the type of well to be completed (new/re-com-
plete, gas, oil, artificial lift, injection, single, dual, horizontal, multilateral, etc.,). Other considerations include the
packer setting method, retrieval method, and formation production and treating.
TUBEMOVE™
There are many factors to consider when designing a well completion. Most factors are obvious but others are
subtle. The more important parameters affecting completion design are incorporated into Baker Oil Tools'
TUBEMOVE program. The “Load Sheet” for this program is included on page 10 of this catalog.
Baker Oil Tools' TUBEMOVE program has been designed to be a user friendly, efficient means of producing
tubing movement calculation reports. The input and output report screen, along with the formulas for the various
calculations have been incorporated into a Microsoft® EXCEL spreadsheet file. The spreadsheet format was cho-
sen to simplify analysis on multiple section and multiple condition applications. The output is user friendly and
easily available in a spreadsheet summary and/or graphic format.
TUBEMOVE performs a series of calculations that allow the user to determine the magnitude of changes in forc-
es, stresses and length of tubulars suspended in wells. If the user of the program can define and input the tem-
perature and pressure parameters that affect the tubular member, the program will perform appropriate
calculations and present the results in a format that is easy to use and understand. Another significant feature
of the program is its ability to calculate the effects of simple deviation. The user supplies the Kick-Off Point
(KOP) and the True Vertical Depth (TVD) and the program performs the appropriate calculations to allow for the
deviation.
TUBEMOVE is a proprietary program based on SPE paper #5143 (entitled “Movements, Forces, and Stresses
Associated With Combination Tubing Strings Sealed in Packers” by Hammer Lindl, and on “Helical Buckling of
Tubing Sealed in Packers” by Lubinski, Althouse, and Logan.)
7
Baker Oil Tools
MATERIAL SELECTION
METAL SELECTION
Baker Oil Tools' equipment is offered in various material configurations depending on well conditions. Baker Oil
Tools employs leaders in the field of metallurgy and polymer chemistry to ensure that we can support our cus-
tomers with superior material recommendations.
For corrosive wells, Baker Oil Tools' Corrosion Metallurgists and Polymer Scientists are available to provide ex-
pert material recommendations. In order to provide the most cost-effective recommendations, the Well Environ-
ment Data form on page 11, has been developed to aid in gathering the necessary well data.
The following alloys and groups of alloys are currently the most common materials used for the construction of
packers and related equipment:
• Standard, non-corrosive service - Low alloy steels (e.g., 4140) with mechanical properties compatible
with API P110 tubulars.
• Non-corrosive service containing H2S - Low alloy steels (e.g., 4140) with mechanical properties com-
patible with API L80 tubulars.
• Corrosive CO2 service with little or no H2S - Martensitic and PH stainless steels (e.g., 9Cr, 13Cr, 17-
4PH, alloy 450, Super 13Cr) with mechanical properties that vary from 80 ksi to 110 ksi minimum yield
strength. The selection of the specific corrosion resistant alloy(s) depends on the environment (pH, chlo-
rides, temperature, H2S, etc.,) and strength requirements.
• Severely corrosive CO2 and H2S - Nickel alloys such as 825, 925, and 718 at strength levels of 110 ksi
minimum yield strength and higher.
• Severely corrosive CO2, H2S, and free sulfur - Nickel alloys such as 625 Plus, 725, and, less fre-
quently, C-276 at strength levels of 120 ksi minimum yield strength and higher.
For equipment required to perform a temporary function and then allowing quick removal by drilling or milling,
an additional group of materials are used:
• Cast iron
• Reinforced polymer based composites
In addition to the more common materials above, Baker Oil Tools manufactures packers and related equipment
from other materials when raw material availability, quantities, delivery schedules, etc., permit. Example alloys
include 316L austenitic, 22 Cr duplex, 25 Cr duplex, 25 Cr super duplex, alloy 20Cb3, 28 Cr super austenitic,
K-500 Monel, alloy 2025, alloy 2535, alloy 2550, alloy G-3, and others.
8
Baker Oil Tools
ELASTOMER SELECTION Viton and have to be protected with a containment

system to prevent failures. Sealing systems using
Seal materials should ideally be inexpensive, have contained premium elastomers are offered as a chev-
high strength and good resiliency and be unaffected ron or v-ring type seal stack.
by thermal or chemical environments. There is no sin-
gle material that offers adequate levels of these char- V-ring seal stacks can tolerate movement while hold-
acteristics for all downhole applications. Effective ing high pressures providing they are always con-
sealing in downhole environments often requires sev- tained within a seal bore. They should never be
eral different materials be combined into a seal sys- allowed to leave the seal bore while they are holding
tem. Several sets of identical seal systems are then differential pressure. Each seal stack is briefly de-
combined to form a seal stack with redundant seals. scribed on page 124. Selecting the most appropriate
seal stack can be simplified by referring to the seal
Choosing the most appropriate seal stack requires a stack service matrix shown below. For additional in-
knowledge of the application and downhole condi- formation regarding packer to tubing seal systems,
tions. Bonded seals are used in applications which re- ask your Baker Oil Tools Representative for a copy of
quire the seals to be repeatedly inserted into and the following:
removed from the seal bore while holding differential
pressure. This action is known as unloading. The de- “What to Consider When Designing Downhole Seals,”
sign of the bonded seal requires the use of high reprinted from World Oil magazine
strength elastomers, usually nitrile or Viton®, which “Factors and Conditions Which Cause Seal Assem-
have limited operational capabilities. blies Used in Downhole Environments to Get Stuck,”
Applications which are beyond the capabilities of Engineering Tech Data™ Paper Number CS007
bonded seals require the use of more inert elas- “Metal-to-metal Sealing in Hostile Environment Com-
tomers. These premium elastomeric materials gener- pletion Equipment,” Engineering Tech Data™ Paper
ally have lower resistance to extrusion than nitrile or Number CS002
Pressure Differential Temp. Environmental Compatibility !

Seal Non-Loading Unloading Range High pH
Type Oil Base Light Brine Bromide Amine
H2S Completion
PSI MPa PSI MPa °F °C Completion Completion Completion
pH > 10
Inhibitors
Nitrile
10,000 68.9 NO NO 32-300 0-149 CaBr2/NaBr2
Chevron NO
OK to 175°F
pH >10
70 Hard
OK
Nitrile 5,000 34.4 32-200 0-93 NO
OK to 200°F
Bonded
ZnBr2 to 250°F
90 Hard pH <10
OK NO
Nitrile 5,000 34.4 32-300 0-149
Bonded
10,000 68.9
90 Hard
Viton 32-250 0-121 5% NO
Bonded NO
32-300 0-149 15% OK OK
V-Ryte™
32-400 0-204 5% to 200°F
80-300 27-149 20%
A-Ryte™
80-450 27-232 7%
NO
80-300 27-149 20% OK
A-HEET™ 15,000 103.3
80-450 27-232 15%
NO NO
K-Ryte® 100-450 38-232 7%
OK OK
K-HEET™ 100-550 38-288 "
Seal-Ryte™ 7%
40-450 4-232 OK
Seal-HEET™ "
R-Ryte™ or
10,000 68.9 325-450# 163-232 7%
Molyglass
! Explosive decompression is both chemical and mechanical in nature related to solubility of gas in elastomer and strength of that elastomer. The elastomeric
seals in these units may be susceptible to explosive decompression, however, explosive decompression does not usually occur while seals are in service.
# Refer to Baker Oil Tools' Packer Systems Technical Manual, Unit No. 8218-3, for complete temperature range information.
" There are no known H2S limitations below 500°F.
9
Baker Oil Tools
Baker Oil Tools

TUBEMOVE™ Load Sheet
TUBEMOVE™ ©1993-BAKER HUGHES, INC.
CUSTOMER:
WELL NAME:
Packer Depth (ft) Packer/Tubing (Anchor = 1, Locator = 0)
Packer Bore (in.) Slack-off (+ lb) [Tension (- lb)]
CRA Tubing High Space-out [Locator ONLY] (in.)
Number Sections Max Wireline Tool OD (in.)
Depth (ft)
Tbg/Csg Tubing OD Tubing ID Tubing Wt Casing ID Tubing Yield
(MD @ Bottom
Configuration (in.) (in.) (lbs/ft) (in.) Strength (psi)
of Section)
Top Section
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Bottom Section
INITIAL CONDITIONS
Surface Bottomhole Surface Tubing Annulus
Temperature
Pressure
(deg F)
(psi)
Fluid Weights (lbs/gal) Tubing Annulus

Top Section
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Bottom Section
DEVIATED WELL CRA TUBING Coefficient

(If Applicable) Type Modulus Of Poisson’s
(If Applicable) Of Thermal
Of Elasticity (E) Ratio
KOP (ft) Expansion (B)
Material (psi) (µ)
TVD (ft) (in./in./deg F)
Top Section
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Bottom Section
FINAL CONDITIONS
RUN NUMBER: 1
CONDITION =
Surface Bottomhole Surface Tubing Annulus
Temperature
Pressure
(deg F)
(psi)
Fluid Weights (lbs/gal) Tubing Annulus

Top Section
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Bottom Section
ADD ADDITIONAL RUNS AS NECESSARY
10
Baker Oil Tools
Well Environment Data For Date:

Requester:
Material Recommendations
Phone:
Baker Oil Tools Fax:
Customer: Well Location/Name:
Well Type: $ Gas $ Oil $ Injection/Disposal! $

Casing/Tubing Selections: (e.g., L80/13 Cr) Coated
Casing OD: Casing Wt: Casing Grade: / $

Tubing OD: Tubing Wt: Tubing Grade: / $
Circle or Underline all bold items in parenthesis to indicate units of measure
Applicable Equipment Type Depth (ft, m) Service Life (yrs, mo, days)
Packer:
SSSV:
BFC:
Liner Hanger:
Other:
Downhole Conditions
Location Max Temperature Min Temperature Max Pressure
@ Reservoir (°F,°C) (°F,°C) (psi, KPa)
@ Wellhead (°F,°C) (°F,°C) (psi, KPa)
Reservoir Depth: (ft, m)

Gas Phase CO2 @ (reservoir or WH): (psia, mole%, ppm)
Gas Phase H2S @ (reservoir or WH): (psia, mole%, ppm)
Field Design (max) Water Content: (bbl/MMSCF, m3/m3)
Field design Water Cut: (%)
Field design (max) Chlorides: (ppm, mg/l)
Bicarbonate Ion Concentration: (ppm, mg/l)
Organic Acid Concentration: (ppm, mg/l)
Production Inhib: (continuous, batch, none) Inhibitor type: (e.g., amine)

Annulus/completion fluid: (e.g., CaCl) Inhib/type: /
Other fluid exposure / concentration / time:
(e.g., mud acid, 15% HCl, xylene, toluene, methanol, caustic, >9 pH mud, scale inhibitor, etc...)
Note: Request copies of water and gas analysis reports and attach to this form.
!For injection and disposal wells, list all liquids and gasses injected. If well will initially be used as a producer,
please fill out two forms. Oxygen ppb is critical for injection well.
11
Baker Oil Tools
PACKER PERFORMANCE DEFINITION
The key to successful performance of any packer is understanding that the combined effects of varying differ-
ential pressure or applied forces cannot be considered independently. Rating a production packer in terms of
differential pressure alone does not sufficiently describe the packer's performance limits. To accurately measure
and compare the performance of various packers, an understanding of the simultaneous effects of differential
pressure and axial loading is required.
Baker Oil Tools has developed
the industry's only means of de-
scribing a packer's performance
capabilities under all possible
loading conditions by combining
computer modeling, sophisticat-
ed numerical stimulation tech-
niques including Finite Element
Analysis, exhaustive laboratory PERFORM Envelope
testing, and field verification. To
apply this technology, a graphical
solution is used to provide an ac-
Tension
curate and useful definition of a
packer's safe operating region.
Applied Axial Load
The system, known as PER- Safe

FORM™ is used to guarantee Operating 0
permanent and retrievable pack- Area

ers are compatible with the de-
Set-Down
mands of today's critical
completions. Ensuring all load
combinations fall inside the re-
gion formed by the curves con-
firms that the equipment is Above 0 Below
adequate for the combined load- Differential Pressure
ing conditions. This area is called
the SAFE PERFORMANCE WIN-
DOW. In those instances where
one or more sets of loading con-
ditions fall outside the SAFE
PERFORMANCE WINDOW a
detailed evaluation of all aspects PERFORM Permanent Packer Rating Envelope
of the proposed completion sys-
tem is required to upgrade its per-
formance.
Some conditions outside the SAFE PERFORMANCE WINDOW reflect a situation where the packer would no
longer be able to maintain its sealing integrity, while others may only restrict the packer from functioning as de-
signed while still retaining pressure integrity. For more information regarding PERFORM envelopes, contact
your local Baker Oil Tools Representative.
12
SINGLE ZONE Baker Oil Tools
PRODUCTION AND INJECTION

COMPLETIONS
APPLICATIONS
In low pressure flowing or injection wells completed in
shallow zones, economical tension set packers are
typically used for the completion. Various mechanical TUBING
set styles are available, normally including a single
packing element system and usually do not include an
internal bypass or unloader. They offer the simplest
means of isolating the casing annulus. These pack-
ers, such as the Model AD-1 Packer, are tension set
by necessity, as their applications will be too shallow
to provide sufficient set-down weight to adequately
pack off the element system.
A common completion of a single zone well at moder-
ate depths and pressures will utilize a compression
set packer which includes features in its design, not
only suited for the well's flowing condition, but also an-
ticipating future pumping treatments of the zone. The
Model R-3 Packer has been widely used as a stan-
dard production packer. These packers are limited to
moderate treating pressures, due to the packer to tub-
ing tension loads, which are seen during treating pro- R-3 DOUBLE GRIP
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
cedures. In higher bottom hole temperature wells,
affects of treating pressures and cooling of the tubing
string must be evaluated to ensure the tension forces
do not force the internal bypass open.
Where high packer to tubing forces during treatments
are anticipated, or for injection completions, mechan-
ical set packers are available which mechanically lock
the internal bypass closed until the packer is re-
leased. These packers, such as the Model A-3 Lok-
Set and J-Lok Packers, are typically used when sig-
nificant packer to tubing forces are anticipated, and
are commonly used in injection applications. In the
most extreme conditions of pressure, temperature,
and packer to tubing loads, the Reliant Model M Pack-
er offers a new standard for high performance reliabil- PUP JOINT
ity. An on/off tubing seal connector will often be

included in these completions to permit retrieval of the
tubing for service without requiring removal of the BOTTOM NO-GO TUBING NIPPLE
packer.
.
WIRELINE ENTRY GUIDE
13
Baker Oil Tools SINGLE ZONE
FRACTURING / STIMULATION
COMPLETION
Fracturing and stimulation operation carried out
through the tubing string impose the highest demands
for retrievable packer performance. In addition to the
conditions existing in the wellbore, these operations
can create tremendous dynamic loads on both the
sealing system and mechanics of the packer. The tool
is often subjected to high bottom hole setting temper-
atures and pressures. High tensile loads are transmit-
ted to the packer as the tubing string is cooled through
the duration of the pumping operations. The packer is
also subjected to extreme reversals of pressure differ-
ential. The packer must be able to anchor the tubing
against the changing tensile loads, as well as main-
tain its seal throughout these procedures and the
well’s return to production.
The Model M Packer was designed specifically to ad-
dress such conditions. It is often run with the Model
L-10 On-Off Connector to provide for circulation of al-
ternate fluids, while permitting the packer to remain
set as the tubing is disconnected for circulation, and
then re-latched (see pages 78 and 129).
MODEL M PACKER
14
FRACTURING REQUIRING ZONE

ISOLATION COMPLETION
APPLICATIONS
The practice of isolating zones while carrying out frac-
ture procedures is common to both new completions
and recompletion procedures. Although various
methods address this need, it is often desirable to em-
ploy a retrievable packer for this purpose. This per-
mits the return of the well to production quickly,
following completion of these procedures. The alter-
native is to set a plug between the zones, requiring
additional trips for removal and running a packer sep-
arately for the completion.
When a production packer is employed for this pur-
BLANKING PLUG
pose, a temporary plugging system is necessary to
complete the isolation. Problems have been encoun-
tered when a wireline retrievable blanking plug has
been installed in a landing nipple below the packer.
Sand deposition in the packer bore and above, has of- L-10 ON/OFF TOOL
ten created difficulty in removal of the plug, and has
compromised packer retrieval in some designs.
The Model WL Packer was designed to address such
applications, with specific features incorporated to ad-
dress these problems. This packer is run with the
Model L-10 On-Off Connector as its companion tool.
Typical installations involve wireline deployment, per-
mitting setting in pressurized wells. With a wireline re-
trievable plug installed in the Model L-10 Seal Nipple
profile prior to deployment, the packer serves as a
temporary bridge plug. With the wireline retrievable
plug installed above the packer, sand can be com-
pletely washed from the plug’s locking mechanism
just prior to reattaching the tubing string to the seal WL PACKER
nipple. The plug is removed, allowing return of the
well to production, and the packer can be removed
simply through right-hand rotation of the tubing.
15
HYDRAULIC SET
PACKER COMPLETION
When it is desirable to flange up the wellhead prior to
setting the packer, or where there is concern about
the ability to get rotation to the packer, hydraulic or hy-
drostatic set packers will be used to complete the
well. Completions with hydraulic or hydrostatic set
packers will include a means of temporarily plugging
the tubing, typically a wireline entry guide with pump
out plug or ball seat for a drop ball, or a profile landing
nipple for use with a wireline retrievable plug. Pump
pressure applied down the tubing string provides ac-
tuation of the packer's setting mechanism.
These packers can be either permanent or retrievable
design. The retrievable versions normally include a
shear release, requiring only straight pull on the pack-
er. The completion design must consider potential
forces acting on the shear release, particularly when
future well treatments are expected.
FH HYDROSTATIC
SINGLE STRING PACKER
PUP JOINT
BOTTOM NO-GO TUBING NIPPLE
16
SEAL BORE PACKER COMPLETION

The single string seal bore packer completion is a
APPLICATIONS
common and simple means of completing a well with
built-in versatility and flexibility. Seal bore packers,
such as the DB and FB-1 Permanent Packers or SC-
2P Retrievable Packers permit large full-bore flow
passages.
The tubing string may be positioned into the seal bore
packer in two ways. A locator tubing seal assembly SAFETY VALVE
provides a high pressure seal between the packer
and tubing and allows upward movement of the seals
during well operations. The inclusion of extra tubing
seal units below a locator, as shown in the accompa-
nying hookup drawing, compensate for tubing move-
ment by traveling through the packer bore and the
seal bore extension. The proper length of the Seal
Bore Extension required can be calculated using the
Tubemove Program and considering all life of well ac-
tivities (see page 7).
CMD SLIDING SLEEVE
Alternatively an Anchor Tubing Seal Assembly may
be used in place of the locator. The anchor attaches
the tubing string to the packer, restricting motion of
the seals and transmitting tubing forces through the
packer to the casing. The anchor is released by right-
G-22 LOCATOR SEAL ASSEMBLY
hand rotation.
The packer and tailpipe assembly are run in and set
either on wireline or tubing with a setting tool. Utiliza-
tion of packer-attached tailpipe permits blanked-off
DB RETAINER PRODUCTION PACKER
retrieval of tubing, eliminating possible formation
damage due to kill fluids.
Both scenarios permit through tubing perforation un- SEAL BORE EXTENSION
der pressure for safety, and flanged up displacement
of well fluid through the sliding sleeve. Pressure and
temperature recording instruments can be set in the
lower seating nipple without restricting the flow path,
yet protecting the instruments from flow turbulence
and vibration. Flow couplings in this and other com-
pletion drawings are recommended based on individ-
ual conditions.
TOP NO-GO NIPPLE
PERFORATED PIPE
BOTTOM NO-GO NIPPLE
17
SEAL BORE PACKER /

PLUG COMPLETION
The RS Setting Nipple tool, used in conjunction with a
seal bore packer, alleviates common problems asso-
ciated with using blanking plugs in the tailpipe of
packers.
The RS Nipple converts a permanent or retrievable
seal bore packer into a temporary bridge plug that is
carried in and set on electric line or drillpipe in a single
run. The system allows an operator a method of per-
forating and stimulating an upper zone while isolating
L-10 ON-OFF
SEALING CONNECTOR
a lower zone. The location of the setting nipple pre-
vents the possibility of plugging the packer tailpipe
with gun debris, stimulation settlings, or fill from upper
zones.
A problem often faced during the workover of a well
with a seal bore packer is caused by debris settling
into the packer and tailpipe while the tubing is re-
moved. If wireline conveyed blanking plugs have
been used to control the well or protect the formation,
recovery problems may be experienced due to the de-
bris sticking or covering the plug. This results in lost
productivity and added costs involved with removing
L-10 ON-OFF
SEALING CONNECTOR
the fill from above the plug or extensive fishing oper-
ations to clear the wellbore.
The RS Setting Nipple completion design can allevi-
ate problems associated with debris filling in the
tailpipe. When a workover is required, a blanking plug
is placed in the nipple profile of the L-10 to affect the
well control before the tubing is removed. When the
tubing is run back into the well, the sand may be
RS SETTING washed away as the standard L-10 Washover Shoe is
NIPPLE engaged. Thus, the blanking plug is free and clear for
removal by conventional methods.
D RETAINER
PRODUCTION
PACKER
18
ONE TRIP COMPLETION

WITH FLOATING SEALS
APPLICATIONS
The combination of a hydraulic set permanent packer with
a Polished Bore Receptacle (PBR) is a very flexible and
common well completion method. This completion method
is chosen when a maximized ID is required to address high
production or treating pump rates.
The permanent packer is designed with an enlarged “alter-
nate” upper bore incorporated above the mechanical parts
of the packer. An Anchor Tubing Seal Assembly is latched SAFETY VALVE
into the alternate bore with a Polished Bore Receptacle
(PBR) extending above it. Thus, flow area can be main-
tained equivalent to the packer's lower bore. These comple-
tions require detailed calculations of all anticipated forces
acting on the tubing, packer and seal assembly, as they are
often run in some of the most demanding conditions.
This completion design allows the entire completion to be
run in one-trip, while permitting displacement of wellbore
fluids and flanged up packer setting.
MONOBORE POLISHED BORE RECEPTACLE

A Monobore is a specialized type of completion often ac-
complished by utilizing a permanent packer and PBR style
hookup. The ID of the liner is maintained through the com-
pletion components and production tubing, allowing for
maximized flow area and minimum ID variations that could
create erosive turbulent flow. Also minimized are restric-
tions that affect well intervention without utilizing a workover
rig.
Typically, a Baker Model SABL(T), no body movement, hy-
draulic set permanent packer is stabbed into a liner top. A KC-22 ANCHOR
Baker NPR (No Profile Required) Production Bridge Plug is TUBING SEAL NIPPLE
either run in place or deployed on electric line, slickline, or

coiled tubing and set in the tubing string below the packer to
SABL(T) HYDRAULIC SET
provide a plugging device for setting purposes. Utilizing the RETAINER PRODUCTION PACKER
NPR in this configuration allows you to complete the well
with a minimally disturbed ID by eliminating restrictions in
the production string, specifically the nipple profiles. The
safety valve, if present, remains as the only restriction in the
system.
NORTH SEA STANDARD

The “Baker Standard Completion System” is a group of
products that form an integrated completion system, con- TIEBACK SEALS
sisting of a PBR, Anchor, Hydraulic Set Packer, and Millout (Existing Liner Top)
Extension. These items form the core of the system, with

crossovers top and bottom connecting to the customer's
tubing.
All the components of the system are reliable field proven
designs, refined for the purpose of providing a standard
product with reduced cost and manufacturing lead times.
The standardized system consists of components manufac-
tured from 4140 or 13% Chrome material, and either nitrile
or Aflas® elastomers, with New Vam connections. The stan-
dardized hookup has received wide acceptance in the North
Sea market for which it was devised. See SAB(L)-4 Packer
on page 66 for further details.
19
Baker Oil Tools MULTIPLE ZONE
MULTIPLE ZONE PLUG-BACK

OPTION COMPLETION
Multizone wells can be completed with a minimized
initial cost and built in flexibility. The plug-back option
completion allows the lower zone to be perforated and
the well produced. Later, without the use of a work-
over rig, the lower zone may be plugged off and the
KC-22 ANCHOR
TUBING SEAL NIPPLE
upper zone perforated and produced. Alternatively,
the zones may be co-mingled at any time during the
well life.
FB-1 RETAINER
PRODUCTION PACKER
MILLOUT EXTENSION
TOP NO-GO TUBING NIPPLE
FB-1 RETAINER
PRODUCTION PACKER
MILLOUT EXTENSION
20
MULTIPLE ZONE Baker Oil Tools
SINGLE STRING
SELECTIVE COMPLETION
APPLICATIONS
The single string selective completion permits selec-
tive production, testing, stimulation, and isolation of
various zones. This example shows a completion us- TOP NO-GO NIPPLE
ing permanent or retrievable seal bore packers and G-22 LOCATOR

locator tubing seal assemblies. The use of seal bore SEAL ASSEMBLY
packers is one method which allows perforating and

testing of each zone as the well is completed progres- DB RETAINER
PRODUCTION PACKER
sively from the bottom up. Selectivity after completion
is accomplished by opening and closing sliding
SEAL BORE EXTENSION
sleeves between the packers. Blast joints located ad-
jacent to producing zones resist the erosive forces of
the produced fluids.
CMD SLIDING SLEEVE
BLAST JOINT
DB RETAINER
PRODUCTION PACKER
SEAL BORE EXTENSION
CMD SLIDING SLEEVE
BLAST JOINT
DB RETAINER
PRODUCTION PACKER
SEAL BORE EXTENSION
BOTTOM NO-GO NIPPLE
21
ONE TRIP SINGLE STRING

SELECTIVE COMPLETION
This single string selective completion allows for a
single trip flanged up completion utilizing HS Hydrau-
CMD SLIDING SLEEVE
lic Set or FH Hydrostatic Set Tubing Retrievable
Packers along with sliding sleeves. The completion
allows for co-mingling of zones or separate produc-
tion, isolation, testing or stimulation of individual
HS SINGLE STRING RETRIEVABLE
HYDRAULIC SET PACKER zones. Selectivity is accomplished by opening and
closing sliding sleeves between the packers. If selec-
tive set hydraulic or hydrostatic set packers are uti-
lized, then each packer can be selectively set and
individually tested to insure proper isolation between
zones.
CMD SLIDING SLEEVE
BLAST JOINT

HYDRAULIC SET PACKER
CMD SLIDING SLEEVE
BLAST JOINT

BOTTOM NO-GO NIPPLE
22
HIGH PRESSURE DUAL

STRING COMPLETION
APPLICATIONS
Completions of high pressure multizone wells will nor-
mally dictate the use of permanent packers. The low-
er packer isolates the lower payzone, with production SAFETY VALVE
directed through the packer's seal assembly, produc-
ing through the long string side of a parallel flow tube.
Flow from the upper zone is produced through the
bore of the upper packer, directed into the short string
bore of the Model A Parallel Flow Tube. This installa-
tion requires an alternate upper bore in the top packer
to provide sufficient diameter for the dual flow paths,
while also providing the seal area to isolate the upper
PARALLEL FLOW TUBE
zone's pressure at the packer. LOCATOR SEAL ASSEMBLY
FAB-1 RETAINER
PRODUCTION PACKER
BLAST JOINT
D RETAINER
PRODUCTION PACKER
MILLOUT EXTENSION
Rev., September, 2001 23

ONE TRIP DUAL COMPLETION

Dual zone completions which are subject to crossflow
or prohibited from co-mingled production can be de-
signed for one-trip installation. Hydraulic set packers
permit flanged up setting, eliminating the need for
wireline. Tubing nipples positioned below each pack-
er provide for the temporary plugging required for set-
ting of the packer, or as required through the life of the
well. A sliding sleeve, positioned on the long string
above the lower packer, provides for circulation or
SAFETY VALVE spotting of fluids for upper zone treatment, or the op-
tion of producing the upper zone through the long
string. Subsurface safety valves installed on both
strings above the dual packer provide the automatic
shut-in of the well in the event of damage to the tree
or tubing strings above the packer, as required in off-
shore completions. This system provides for single
SCOOPHEAD trip retrievability of the entire completion system.
GT HYDRAULIC
SET DAUL PACKER
BLAST JOINT
CMD SLIDING SLEEVE

E HYDRO-TRIP PRESURE SUB
24
ONE TRIP SELECTIVE

DUAL COMPLETION
APPLICATIONS
Multizone completions can be addressed with both
flexibility and long term economics incorporated into CMD SLIDING SLEEVE
the design. The use of both dual and single string hy-
draulic set retrievable packers provides for setting of
all the packers following installation of the tree. Multi-
ple payzones can be perforated in the initial comple- GT HYDRAULIC SET
tion procedures, then isolated as desired without DUAL PACKER
requiring future rig intervention. Sliding sleeves can

be positioned to selectively produce from either tub- TELESCOPING SWIVEL SUB
ing string between the dual packers. A telescoping CMD SLIDING SLEEVE
swivel sub is positioned below the upper dual packer

on the short string to accommodate the run-in and
make up procedures. Landing nipples are positioned
below the lower dual packer, as well as lower single BLAST JOINT
string packer, which provide for temporary plugging

required during the packer setting procedures. This
type of completion configuration offers long term flex-
ibility for changing well conditions, while providing a
GT HYDRAULIC
completely retrievable completion system. SET DUAL PACKER
BLAST JOINT
CMD SLIDING SLEEVE

BLAST JOINT
CMD SLIDING SLEEVE

25
Baker Oil Tools DEEPWATER
PACKER SETTING VALVE

DEEPWATER COMPLETION
In Deepwater completions, it is desired to set the
packer without the requirement of intervention. The
SAFETY VALVE Full Bore Isolation Valve (FBIV), run as part of the
completion tailpipe, is one means to achieve this. This
tool operates by pressure cycles down the tubing and
provides the opportunity to test the completion tubing
before setting the packer.
When run in hole, the FBIV has a disc closing off the
SEATING NIPPLE tubing and a complimentary Multi-Cycle Tool (MCT)
to permit self-fill of the completion as it is run. Once at
depth, pressure cycles are required to close the MCT
to allow tubing tests. Further pressure cycles are ap-
plied to lock the MCT closed and set the completion
packer. Additional pressure cycles down the tubing
then function the FBIV to the open position. These
tools leave a full-open internal diameter.
After the packer is set the FBIV may be left in the
PREMIER PACKER closed position as a suspension barrier, then opened
later by pressure cycles through the production tubing
or flow line, eliminating the need for intervention to
bring the well on line. This functionality has the poten-
tial to save the operator millions of dollars in offshore
applications.
SEATING NIPPLE
MULTI-CYCLE TOOL
FULL BORE ISOLATION VALVE
26 Rev., February, 2003

DEEPWATER Baker Oil Tools
EXTENDED REACH COMPLETION

“Deepwater” completions are considered to be those
APPLICATIONS
wells completed in 1,000 or more feet of water. Technol-
ogy is growing at a rapid pace in this field in an effort to
reach production quicker and reduce overall costs. The
example below of an extended reach, highly deviated,
gravel packed, North Sea completion features some of
Baker Oil Tools' advanced technologies.
SAFETY VALVE
After this well was gravel packed, the upper was run in
and set without further intervention. The upper comple-
tion, consisting of the Model SB-3H Packer and PBR
Seal Assembly was run and stung into the gravel pack
packer. After space out, the packer was activated by hy-
draulic pressure being applied to the well, without the
use of a plug in the tubing. A Baker Oil Tools' Fluid Loss
Control Valve (FLCV), was run below the gravel pack
packer, protecting the formation. The FLCV was opened
by additional cycles of applied hydraulic pressure, there-
by completing the well without further intervention.
The Model SB-3H Packer has been developed by merg-
ing hydraulic and hydrostatic technologies into a design
POLISHED BORE RECEPTACLE platform that reduces rig and packer setting and minimiz-
es the risk associated with standard well intervention set-
ting methods (see page 64).
The main philosophy behind the well design is to batch
complete the gravel packed zone and then displace
to completion fluid above the closed fluid control
SB-3H PACKER valve. This will reduce time when re-entering the
well and will prevent completion fluid from
contacting the reservoir. A second objec-
tive is to allow underbalancing of the well
TOP NO-GO while the FLCV contains the reservoir.
TUBING NIPPLE This means that after the upper
completion is set, the well is
under balanced and once
NON-SEALING PBR WITH the FLCV is opened
TUBING SEAL ANCHOR
the well will flow.
SEAL BORE PACKER AND

GRAVEL PACK COMPLETION
FLUID LOSS
CONTROL VALVE
27
Baker Oil Tools DEEPWATER
OPTIMIZED TLP
DEEPWATER
COMPLETION
“Deepwater” completions have many
CONTROL LINE ORIENTATION COLLAR
special considerations. One of these is
the major economic impact of the size
of offshore Tension Leg Platforms
(TLPs). The major factor influencing
the size of the TLP is the weight of the MUD LINE TUBING HANGER (MLTH)
equipment it must support. The weight
of the production tubing, which be-
comes more exaggerated as drilling
depth increases, led Baker Oil Tools to
develop the Mud Line Tubing Hanger
(MLTH) to suspend the production tub-
ing in dual riser TLP applications for a
Gulf Coast operator.
As shown in this illustration, the MLTH
affords multiple control and instrumen- SAFETY VALVE
tation line bypass for safety valves and
gauges. Additional features, such as
the ability to displace nitrogen into the
annulus from the MLTH to the surface
for thermal insulation purposes are dis-
cussed on page 106.
To streamline well completion activities
and greatly reduce rig-time risk and
costs, the upper completion of this well GAUGE CARRIER
employed Baker Oil Tools' EDGE® Re- TOP NO-GO TUBING NIPPLE
mote Actuation System (see page
149). After displacing the well to com-
pletion fluid, the gravel pack was isolat-
ed with a single string retrievable
EDGE SET SINGLE STRING PACKER
packer, which was set without interven-
tion by wireline or coil tubing.
BOTTOM NO-GO
TUBING NIPPLE
STINGER
SEAL BORE
PACKER AND
GRAVEL PACK
COMPLETION
28
DEEPWATER Baker Oil Tools
SINGLE RISER TLP

DEEPWATER COMPLETION
APPLICATIONS
A desire to minimize cost and add func-
tionality to a tubing hanger system led
Baker Oil Tools to develop the system
shown below. FLX PACK-OFF TUBING HANGER
The Baker Pack-Off Tubing Hanger

(POTH) allows an operator to utilize only
one riser to the TLP, while maintaining
dual barriers and allowing downhole
monitoring, chemical injection, safety
valves, and improving workover function-
ality. The control lines and TEC wire pass
through the POTH without connections to
minimize leak paths. Upper and lower an-
nulus pressure and communication are
monitored and controlled with a special-
ized T-Series Safety Valve. A special NM
Punch Release Anchor with control line
severing feature facilitates removing the COMMUNICATON SLEEVE/
PUNCH RELEASE NIPPLE
upper tubing string without cutting or ro-
tation. The POTH assembly combines
these functions into a single, safe, reli-
able assembly that allows the customer's
TLP to utilize a single riser, saving tens of
CHEMICAL INJECTION VALVES
thousands of pounds in weight and many
hours of rig-time and capital expenditure
(see page 107). FLOW COUPLING
As described previously, the completion

packer is set using the in-situ hydrostatic T SERIES SAFETY VALVE
pressure; and is remotely activated using
Baker Oil Tools' EDGE technology after
the well has been displaced to comple- FLOW COUPLING
tion fluid and flanged up; again saving

considerable rig-time dollars while mini-
mizing risk.
PRESSURE GAUGE
NM PUNCH RELEASE ANCHOR
SINGLE STRING EDGE SET PACKER
PERFORATED JOINT
SEAL BORE PACKER
.
Rev., February, 2003 29
Baker Oil Tools HIGH PRESSURE HIGH TEMPERATURE
HIGH PRESSURE HIGH

TEMPERATURE COMPLETION
Wells above 300°F and 10,000 psi differential pres-
sure are generally considered hostile environment, or
High Pressure High Temperature (HPHT), comple-
tions. Baker Oil Tools offers a host of equipment spe-
cifically designed for use in hostile environment wells.
SAFETY VALVE At first glance, the hookup shown below appears the
same as a simple single zone completion. However,
the equipment is specifically designed to handle the
extreme conditions of an HPHT well. One-trip hydrau-
lic set systems, and various tubing release systems
are also available in HPHT trim.
In addition to packers, Baker Oil Tools offers a full
complement of HPHT completion equipment, includ-
ing safety valves and flow control equipment rated to
15,000 psi at 450°F, as well as liner hangers and liner
top packers rated in excess of 10,000 psi at 350°F.
Special order packers have been used in applications
TOP NO-GO TUBING NIPPLE requiring 20,000 psi differential pressure capability at
the packer. Contact your Baker Oil Tools Representa-
tive for further information about HPHT products.
FB-3 RETAINER
PRODUCTION PACKER
SEAL BORE EXTENSION
FLOW COUPLING
30
THERMAL Baker Oil Tools
SINGLE ZONE THERMAL

COMPLETION
APPLICATIONS
Thermal completions pose especially difficult condi-
tions for a production packer. In addition to the obvi-
ous high temperatures that the tool is exposed to,
there are large and sometimes frequent temperature
fluctuations. To further impede performance, scale
and other deposits form due to the boiling of fluids
around the packer. A further consideration is that ther-
mal applications are often economically marginal in
addition to being technically challenging.
The Model MJS Retrievable Packer is a rotationally
set packer that can be set in deep or shallow wells. It's
double-grip design makes it ideal for use in steam in-
jection, huff and puff or geothermal wells where differ-
ential pressures from above and below are antici-
pated. The packer's integral expansion joint provides
for tubing movement during steaming and producing
cycles and eliminates the need for additional equip-
ment above the packer. For applications utilizing insu-
lated tubing, the packer is available with an
insulated mandrel to reduce heat loss. During expan-
sion and contraction, scraper rings protect the internal
seal system from deposits that build up on the man-
drel due to local boiling. An outer element system
above the slips protects the releasing system from
MJS THERMAL PACKER WITH
debris (see page 79). INTEGRAL EXPANSION JOINT

Baker Oil Tools
CO2 INJECTION AND WATERFLOOD

COMPLETIONS
The typical characteristics of these applications in-
volve the desire to control the charged formation pres-
sures without requiring killing of the well. Corrosion
and scale accumulation are also common character-
istics to be considered when specifying the downhole
tools. The economical Model A-3 or large bore AL-2
Lok-Set is selected for these applications to allow set-
ting the packer in relatively shallow wells, and leaving
the tubing in tension, neutral, or compression.
The Model B Two Way Downhole Shut-Off Valve can
be run directly above the Lok-Set packer to allow the
packer to serve as a bridge plug, controlling pres-
sures during tubing removal and re-installation. This
mechani-cally actuated ball valve provides an alterna-
tive to relying on proper setting of a wireline retriev-
able plug, as scale often interferes with its setting,
retrieving, and sealing reliability. The valve also elim-
inates potential damage associated with wireline run-
ning in expensive internally plastic coated tubing.
The Model L-316 On-Off Connector is typically run di-
rectly above the shut-off valve. The left-hand torque
required to disconnect the on-off connector also
serves to close the shut-off valve with one-half turn
left-hand rotation. When the tubing is re-engaged to
the seal nipple, the shut-off valve is opened with one-
half right-hand rotation at the tool.
32
WATERFLOOD Baker Oil Tools
MULTIZONE WATERFLOOD
INJECTOR COMPLETION
APPLICATIONS
Applications for waterflood completions requiring mul-
tizone injection can be economically addressed with
single string packers. Downhole flow regulators, in-
stalled in side pocket mandrels provide control of vol-
umes directed to the upper zones. The profile in the
TANDEM TENSION PACKER
lower Nipple profile below the lower packer can ac-
commodate an in-line flow regulator to control injec-
tion into the lower zone.
SIDE POCKET MANDREL WITH

DOWNHOLE FLOW REGULATOR
TANDEM TENSION PACKER
SIDE POCKET MANDREL WITH

A-3 LOK-SET
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
33
Baker Oil Tools ELECTRIC SUBMERSIBLE PUMP
SINGLE ZONE ESP COMPLETION

In conventional ESP Applications, the hydraulic or hy-
drostatic set dual packer performs the function of tub-
ing hanger and well control device. If gas is present
during production, a Model AGV or VR Gas Vent
Valve may be mounted in a vent port in the packer to
reduce the volume of free gas produced through the
pump which increases efficiency. The short string
packer bore is fitted with a cable packoff device and
accommodates passage of the power cable. Circula-
tion above the packer is accomplished through a slid-
ing sleeve. In many applications a standing valve is
placed above the pump to prevent back-flow when the
pump is turned off, preventing possible damage to the
GAS VENT
pump when the motor is restarted.
DUAL PACKER
CENTRILIFT ESP
34
ELECTRIC SUBMERSIBLE PUMP Baker Oil Tools
SINGLE ZONE ESP WITH WIRELINE

ACCESS
APPLICATIONS
A very common ESP pump completion scenario in-
volves a formation that will flow naturally, but where
kill weight fluids would damage the formation during a
workover, and wireline access to the formation for log-
ging and monitoring purposes is desired. The Y-Block SAFETY VALVE
in the production string allows wireline access below
the pump and motor assembly through the tubing for
these purposes. In the event of a workover, a wireline
blanking plug can be set below the seal bore packer
to maintain well control while the upper section of the
completion is removed from the well.
The production normally flows from the producing for-
DUAL PACKER
mation below the seal bore packer, through the sliding
sleeve, into the annulus and pump inlet. If desired, the
sleeve can be closed to permit direct production from
the formation to the surface, bypassing the pump.
In certain applications it is desired to monitor the well
continuously; optional feed-thru passages in the dual
packer can facilitate running of downhole gauges.
In applications where the casing design will not permit
the use of bypass tubing alongside the pump assem-
bly, an AJL Valve or Q-22 Sliding Sleeve can be
placed below the seal bore packer in order to maintain
well control during workovers without wireline inter- Y-BLOCK
vention. These products are described in the Baker
Oil Tools' Flow Control Product Catalog.
CENTRILIFT ESP
CMD SLIDING SLEEVE
LOCATOR SEAL ASSEMBLY
SEAL BORE PACKER
MILLOUT EXTENSION
35
ESP WITH DOWNHOLE OIL

WATER SEPARATION
A major problem for ESP produced wells is the large
volume of water which is produced with the oil. Water
production increases the cost of power, disposal,
maintenance, as well as affecting the production rate.
A solution is the installation of a Baker Hughes Hy-
droSep® Downhole Oil-Water Separator System,
which separates oil and water in the wellbore, lowers
lifting costs and optimizes oil recovery. HydroSep
makes marginal wells profitable and extends eco-
nomic life of wells, which increases ultimate recovery.
HydroSep is an integrated system:
• Baker Oil Tools - Packers and flow controls, chemi-
cal injection and instrumentation;
• Centrilift - Downhole pumps and motors, cables and
control systems;
CENTRILIFT SUBSEP OIL - • Baker Process Systems - Subsep® Hydrocyclone
WATER SEPARATION SYSTEM
Oil-Water Separator Systems;
• Baker Petrolite - Treating chemicals
The oil and remaining water is transferred to the pump
and produced from the well. The water separated in
LOCATOR SEAL ASSEMBLY the hydrocyclone is then injected into a disposal zone,
either above or below the production zone.
SEAL BORE PACKER
MILLOUT EXTENSION
Q-22 SLIDING SLEEVE
BULL PLUG
36
ELECTRIC SUBMERSIBLE PUMP Baker Oil Tools
COIL TUBING DEPLOYED ESPCP

Control Line to Surface Centrilift Electrocoil Tubing
SYSTEM FOR HIGH-GOR Gas Vents up Coil Tubing
APPLICATIONS
APPLICATIONS Electrocoil Connector Sub
Gas Bypass Tubes
HIGH-GOR ELECTROCOIL® Oil Flows up Casing
DEPLOYED ESP APPLICATION

Centrilift ESP Motor
and Gear Reducer
Baker Oil Tools in conjunction with Baker Hughes
Centrilift has developed a system for ESP deploy-
ment on coil tubing, called Electrocoil, to permit live
well completions without a service rig, reducing down-
Slimline PCP Pump
time and pump repair costs. The hookup shown fea-
tures a gas-oil separator vented through an AGV High Control Line
for Gas Vent Valve
Pressure Gas Vent Valve to the Electrocoil, allowing
the produced free gas to be routed up the coil tubing
string while production comes up the casing annulus, Model AGV High
Pressure Gas Vent Valve
allowing maximum pump efficiency.
Gas Vent Ports
The electric cable is suspended by dimples in the coil
tubing, which can allow the flexibility of including Bak-
Parallel Flow Adapter
er Oil Tools' TEC wire within the coil tubing for down-
hole gauges, if desired. (Not shown)
Seal Bore Packer
Tubing Mandrel
Q-22 Sliding Sleeve
Gas Flow into

Sliding Sleeve Ports
Oil/Gas Flow from Perfs

Oil-Gas Separator
Oil Flows up Siphon Tube
Model F Nipple With

Model FB-2 Retrievable
Check Valve
37
INTELLIGENT WELL SYSTEM

The following well has two productive zones produced
by electric submersible pump. The lower zone tends
to generate excessive water when produced continu-
ously, and has excellent oil reserves, but requires pe-
riodic shut-in to allow the water inflow to subside. The
objective is to maximize oil production, utilizing real-
time management of the lower zone. Previously, the
lower zone has not been produced due to the water
coning problems.
The previous completion design did not have the
space to install a Y-Block to allow intervention for the
manipulation of a conventional flow control device.
Therefore, the ability to periodically shut off the lower
zone production without well intervention was need- ESP
ed.
This solution isolates the upper and lower zones with
a D-ESP Packer and permits unrestricted production
from the upper zone. A surface-controlled hydraulical-
ly operated sliding sleeve (HCM) regulates lower
zone inflow when reservoir conditions require, thus al-
leviating the need for intervention. Temperature and
pressure sensors to monitor contribution from the low-
er zone are incorporated.
HCM HYDRAULIC SLIDING SLEEVE
DOWNHOLE GAUGES
D-ESP PACKER
38
MULTILATERAL Baker Oil Tools
TAML CATEGORIZATION
TAML (Technology Advancement of Multilaterals) is a group of operators with multilateral experience who de-
APPLICATIONS
veloped a categorization system for multilateral wells based on the amount and type of support provided at the
junction. This categorization makes it easier for operators to recognize and compare the functionality and risk-
to-reward evaluations of one multilateral completion design to another. Recognized TAML levels increase in
flexibility from Level 1 (simple open hole mainbore) through Level 6 as shown.
LEVEL 1
Open hole mainbore and lateral. Possible to set unsup-
ported slotted liner or screen in lateral or mainbore.
LEVEL 2
Cased and cemented mainbore with an open hole later-
al. Possible to set unsupported slotted liner or screen in
the lateral.

Baker Oil Tools MULTILATERAL
LEVEL 3 LEVEL 5
Cased and cemented Cased and cemented
mainbore with an open mainbore and lateral.
hole lateral. Slotted liner Pressure integrity is
or screen set in the later- achieved by the comple-
al and anchored back tion to isolate the junc-
into the mainbore cas- tion from produced or
ing. First TAML level to injected fluids.
offer mechanical sup-
port at the junction.
LEVEL 4 LEVEL 6
Cased and cemented Mechanical and pres-
mainbore and lateral. sure integrity at the junc-
Lateral is now cemented tion is achieved by using
offering mechanical sup- the casing to seal the
port, but the cement junction.
does not offer pressure
integrity at the junction.
40
LEVEL 2
MULTILATERAL SYSTEMS
APPLICATIONS
A Level 2 Multilateral is constructed using the WindowMaster™ Whipstock System to create the casing exit win-
dow. This system can be deployed in one-trip with the use of a collet and casing profile for depth control and
MWD/Gyro for orientation of the whipstock face. A Retrievable TorqueMaster™ Packer is incorporated to an-
chor the system during milling and lateral drilling operations. Once the lateral is completed, the entire Window-
Master and Retrievable TorqueMaster Packer can be retrieved from the well to retain full mainbore ID below the
junction window. For permanent thru-tubing access into the lateral, a Lateral Entry Nipple (LEN™) can be run
in the final completion when a permanent ML TorqueMaster Packer is installed. The ML TorqueMaster Packer
offers a profile that aligns to both the milling anchor and the production anchor for exact orientation of the whip-
stock face and LEN to the casing exit window.
WINDOWMASTER WHIPSTOCK
LATERAL ENTRY NIPPLE
RETRIEVABLE TORQUEMASTER PACKER
ML TORQUEMASTER PACKER
INDICATING COLLET AND SUB
41
LEVEL 3
The corner stone of the Level 3 Multilateral System is the HOOK™ Hanger, which is used to create a junction providing a
supported lateral and selective access into both wellbores. A HOOK Hanger Level 3 Multilateral begins with the Window-
Master™ Whipstock System to create the casing exit window. This system can easily be easily deployed in one-trip to the
desired depth with MWD/gyro for orientation of the whipstock face. A Retrievable TorqueMaster™ Packer (see page 108)
can be incorporated to anchor the system during milling and lateral drilling operations or alternatively, a bottom trip anchor
may be utilized. Once the lateral is completed, the entire WindowMaster and Retrievable TorqueMaster, or bottom trip an-
chor system, can be pulled from the well to maintain maximum mainbore ID below the junction window. The screen or liner
along with the HOOK Hanger assembly are run into the well on the same trip. A bent joint guides the screen or liner into the
lateral.
As the HOOK Hanger enters the casing exit, the hook extension automatically orients and engages at the bottom of the cas-
ing exit window. This self-orienting feature insures that once landed, the HOOK Hanger window is properly aligned and
therefore providing continued mainbore access without any additional milling or wash over operations. A hold-down assem-
bly can then be activated to anchor the HOOK Hanger in place.
Advantages of the Level 3 HOOK Hanger over other multilateral systems include:
• Simple, low risk deployment of the Hook Hanger assembly
• Affordable supported junction option for a variety of environments
• Available in stackable models and with sand exclusion options
• Simple diverter installation for re-entry into the lateral or mainbore
The HOOK Hanger diverters are deployed on coiled tubing or coupled pipe. The lateral diverter is an inner sleeve which
straddles the mainbore window to direct all re-entry into the lateral. The mainbore diverter is run inside the HOOK Hanger
where the helical profile orients a scoop face to deflect all re-entry into the mainbore.
ESP SYSTEM
HOOK HANGER HOLD-DOWN
HOOK HANGER
SEAL BORE PACKER
42
LEVEL 4
APPLICATIONS
The Level 4 Multilateral System provides a lateral lin-
er that has been cemented back to the junction area
utilizing Baker Oil Tools' ROOT SystemSM Process.
This technique offers mechanical integrity at the
junction, but it does not provide pressure integrity.
In order to create a level 4 junction, the mainbore is
first drilled and completed using conventional proce-
dures. Either an MLZXP™ Liner Hanger Packer or
ML Torquemaster™ Packer is then run and set be-
low the intended junction depth. These two tools both
contain an integral orientation profile used to orient
the ML Whipstock Assembly in the desired direction FB-1 SEAL BORE PACKER
for kickoff. An orientation run is made to determine
this profile orientation, and the ML Whipstock As-
sembly is adjusted at surface to the desired window
azimuth. The ML Whipstock is next run and stung
into the MLZXP or ML Torquemaster Packer™
where it self-orients on the profile. The window is LATERAL ENTRY NIPPLE
milled and the lateral is drilled to the desired depth.
Conventional liner or screen assemblies are then run
in the lateral bore. The liner portion is then cemented
in place and sufficient cement is pumped to allow for
displacement into the junction area.
With the lateral liner cemented in place, access into
the lower bore is then regained with the use of a
washover operation. This procedure utilizes a wash- SEAL ASSEMBLY
over assembly designed to retrieve both the lateral
liner extending into the mainbore and the ML Whip-
stock itself. Once this occurs, the lower bore is again
accessible.
Several completion options are available with a Level
4 Multilateral System. A standard sliding sleeve can
be installed for flow control and isolation capabilities.
If selective access into either lateral is also desired,
a Baker Oil Tools Lateral Entry Nipple (LEN) can be
utilized. This LEN contains a pre-milled window that MLZXP PACKER
matches up to the existing casing exit when the LEN
is installed and automatically oriented into the
MLZXP or ML Torquemaster™ Packer. Once the
LEN is in place, production isolation or thru-tubing
selective access into either bore is possible by first
running specifically designed diverters or blanking
sleeves into the LEN system.
Key features of the Level 4 Multilateral System in-
clude:
• Mechanical support achieved at the junction by
cementing the lateral
• Production isolation and control is possible using
standard Baker Oil Tools flow control devices
• Selective re-entry access in addition to production
isolation and flow control is possible with the utili-
zation of Baker Oil Tools' Lateral Entry Nipple sys-
tem
43
LEVEL 5 tions with a Baker Oil Tools' Level 5

Multilateral System. Illustrated is a
MULTILATERAL SYSTEMS Level 5 Multilateral system utilizing a
The Level 5 Multilateral System offers Selective Re-entry Tool (SRT™)
pressure integrity at the junction above the junction to provide commin-
through the use of completion equip- gled production of both zones. Selec-
ment designed to straddle the junction tive thru-tubing access into either bore
area. Typically, a Level 5 Multilateral is possible through the use of a divert-
System builds from the basic level 4 ing tool that can be run in the SRT on
ROOT SystemSM in terms of cementing either coiled tubing or wireline.
the lateral in place (see Level 4 infor- Not pictured but also possible is the uti-
mation, page 43, for details). The hy- lization of a dual packer above the
draulic isolation of the junction is then junction providing isolated production
achieved by isolating the junction using from each zone and continued thru-
three conventional isolation packers: in tubing access into either wellbore.
the lateral, in the mainbore below the
window, and in the mainbore above the Key features of the Level 5 Multilateral
packer. System include:
FH PACKER Along with these packers, a Scoop- • Pressure integrity at the junction
head Diverter Tool is utilized down hole achieved with completion packers
to place and tie back the production and straddle tubing
tubing between each packer. • Commingled or isolated dual produc-
tion completion options
Commingled production, isolated dual
• Selective access into either bore is
production, selective access into each
possible in both commingled and
bore are all possible completion op-
SELECTIVE
dual production completion options
RE-ENTRY TOOL
ML SCOOPHEAD DIVERTER
TIE-BACK SEAL ASSEMLBY
TORQUEMASTER PACKER
DAB PACKER
FLOW COUPLING
SIZE: 3-1/2"
44
LEVEL 6
APPLICATIONS
Baker Oil Tools completed the world’s first Level 6
Multilateral with the FORMation Junction™ Multilater-
al Junction System. The FORMation Junction is an in- GT
verted Y-Block junction that is installed with one leg in DUAL PACKER
a pre-formed, non-circular shape to allow two 7" legs

to drift inside 13-3/8" casing or a 12-1/4" open hole
while being run in on a 9-5/8" casing string. The
9-5/8" casing is landed such that the FORMation
Junction rests in a 17" underreamed section. The pre-
formed 7" leg is then re-formed with a swaging as-
sembly back to drift ID dimensions for 7" casing. The
FORMation Junction is pressure tested and cement- DUAL
COMPLETION
ed in place using an inner cementing string. The legs MODULE
can then be selectively drilled out with the simple in-
stallation of the desired diverter. Advantages of the
FORMation Junction Level 6 System over other mul-
tilateral systems include:
• Elimination of window exit creation
• Pressure integrity at the junction using the FORMation
JUNCTION
casing
• Low risk, simple installation procedures
• Utilizes standard casing and cementing equip-
ment and procedures
The illustrated installation shows one of the optional
final completion options - the Dual Completion Mod-
ule (DCM). This module allows for separate produc-
tion of each leg to surface. The DCM self-orients on a
key which directs one tubing string to sting into a seal
bore packer. The annulus is then isolated by a GT
Dual Production Packer. The DCM also provides per- DAB PACKER
manent, thru-tubing re-entry access into each lateral.
45
LEVEL 6
The DeepSet™ Splitter (DSS) is based on conventional
splitter design with an inverted “Y” Block junction. The
13-3/8" x 7-5/8" x 7-5/8" Deep-Set Splitter is conveyed on
13-3/8” casing into a drilled/underreamed hole of 17-1/2".
A riser system is then installed inside the Deep-Set Split-
ter to provide a separate conduit for cementing operations
and to ensure velocities are sufficient to clean the hole
during drilling.
Advantages of the Deep-Set Splitter Level 6 System over
other multilateral systems include: DUAL COMPLETION
SCOOPHEAD DIVERTER
• Elimination of casing exit and the resulting debris
• Provides highest-pressure integrity at the junction
using the casing
• Low risk, simple installation procedures
• Optional riser systems as required isolates the
junction from drilling and cementing operations
SC-1 PACKER
The illustrated installation shows one of the final comple-
tion options - the DSS Scoophead Diverter. This module
allows for separate production of each leg to surface. The
DSS Scoophead Diverter self-orients on a key which di-
rects one tubing string to sting into a 7-5/8" seal bore
packer. The second tubing string telescopes through the
DSS Scoophead Diverter and stings into the second
7-5/8" seal bore packer. The well produces and is re-en- ZXP LINER
HANGER PACKER
tered as if the laterals were two independent wells.
46
MULTILATERAL COMPLETION WITH -

INTELLIGENT WELL SYSTEM
APPLICATIONS
Multiple Feed Through (MFT) Packers, and the technologies
T-SERIES SAFETY VALVE
they enable, can eliminate the need for several types of well in-
tervention. These packers are designed to allow hydraulic and/or
CONTROL LINES
electrical cable to bypass the packer while maintaining the annu-
lus pressure integrity.
MULTIPLE FEED In this typical two-zone Level 4 Multilateral completion, the hy-
THROUGH PACKERS
draulic lines are used to operate a hydraulic controlled sliding
sleeve (HCM) which allows interventionless control of production
from the laterals. Thus, the lower zone can be produced first, with
the upper zone isolated. Once the lower zone begins to produce
HCM HYDRAULIC
SLIDING SLEEVE water or depletes to an unproductive level, the lower zone can be
shut off and the upper zone opened for production. This entire
operation can be done without the need for wireline or other
SHROUDED HCM types of intervention.
HYDRAULIC SLIDING
SLEEVE Gauges can also be placed below the packer, allowing for pro-
duction pressure monitoring and selective transient pressure
testing of each interval.
GAUGE CARRIER
For further information on Baker Oil Tools' rapidly expanding line
of MFT Packers, HCM Sliding Sleeves, Sentry gauges, electric
cable, or other interventionless technologies, contact your local
LATERAL
ENTRY NIPPLE Baker Oil Tools Representative.
LOCATOR SEAL ASSEMBLY
TORQUEMASTER PACKER
SC-1 GRAVEL GRAVEL

PACK PACKER PACK SCREEN
47
Baker Oil Tools
NOTES
48
PERMANENT PACKER SYSTEMS Baker Oil Tools
PERMANENT PACKER SELECTION CHART

Setting Method
Product No
Product Catalog Single Alternate Wireline /
Family Other Mandrel
Description Page Bore Bore Hydraulic Hydraulic Hydrostatic
No. Movement
Setting Tool
H41505, H41525
D, DB 50 x x
and H41513
H41514, H41508,
DA, DAB
H41526 and 52 x x
H41503
F-1, FB-1 H41306, H41308
54 x x
and H41340
H41309, H41307,
FA, FA-1,
H41309, and 56 x x
FAB, FAB-1
H41341
PERMANENT PACKER
FB-3 H41350 58 x x
HE H42101 59 x x
SYSTEMS
HEA H42103 59 x x
SB-3 H40906 60 x x
SAB-3,
H40907, H40908 62 x x
SABL-3
SABL-4 H40921 66 x x
SB-3H H40932 64 x x
SBT H40916 65 x x x
H40917
SABT 65 x x x
and H40918
Torquemaster H41518 67 x x x

Baker Oil Tools PERMANENT PACKER SYSTEMS
MODEL D™ AND DB™ FEATURES/BENEFITS

• Proven reliability
RETAINER
• Slim-line design
PRODUCTION PACKER • Solid construction that makes pos-
Product Family Nos. H41505, sible a significant savings in rig-
H41525, and H41513 time by providing a 50% faster run-
in without fear of impact damage
DESCRIPTION or premature setting
Baker's Model D and DB Retainer • Two opposed sets of full-circle, full
Production Packers are the most strength slips assure that the
widely used, most versatile, high packer will stay where it is set
performance permanent production • A packing element that resists
packers available. They are fre- swab-off but packs off securely
quently used as a permanent when the packer is set
squeeze or testing packer, or as a • Unique interlocked expandable
permanent or temporary bridge metal back-up rings contact the
plug. casing and create a positive bar-
rier to packing element extrusion
The Model DB is distinguished from • Aflas packing element is available
the Model D by the DB's threaded in select casing weight ranges
(box or pin) bottom guide. This DB
Guide can be specified for accep- ACCESSORIES
tance of a Millout Extension, a Seal Packer Plugging Devices (page 140)
Bore Extension, or virtually any Packer Sealing Systems (page 118)
component desired. Model D Pack-
Packer Extensions (page 146)
ers and their guides can also be or-
Parallel Flow Systems (page 139)
dered separately by those
interested in maximum inventory
flexibility.
PERFORM Packer Performance
Envelopes are available for all sizes
of the Model D Packers (see page
12).
APPLICATIONS
• Production, injection and zonal
isolation
• Sump packer
• Squeeze or test packer
• Permanent or temporary bridge
plug
Model DB Retainer Production Packer

with B Guide for Millout Extension
Product Family No. H41505
50
D RETAINER PRODUCTION PACKER, PRODUCT FAMILY NOS. H41505, H41525, AND H41513
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer ! Seal Assembly # Casing Packer ! Seal Assembly #

Diameter of Diameter of
Max Min Bore Max Min Bore
OD Weight " Sealing OD Weight " Sealing
Size & OD Size Thru Seals ‡ Size & OD Size Thru Seals ‡
Bore Bore
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm in. mm
17.0-18.9 19-25 3.475 88.2 40/80-26 1.968 49.9
2.500 63.5 20-25 1.865 47.3 7-5/8 193.6 24-33.7 92-26 6.375 161.9 2.688 68.2
15.1-17.0 21-25 3.562 90.4 41/81-26 1.750 44.4
21-19 1.312 33.3 60/80-32 2.406 61.1
11.6-15.1 22-19 3.593 91.2 1.968 49.9 88-32 3.250 82.5
4-1/2 20/40-19 .984 24.9 61/81-32 1.990 50.5
114.3 7-3/4 196.9 46.1-48.6 6.187 157.1
' 40/80-26 1.968 49.9 40/80-26 1.968 49.9
10.5-13.5 23-26 3.750 95.2 2.688 68.2 88-26 2.688 68.2
41/81-26 1.750 44.4 41/81-26 1.750 44.4
21-19 1.312 33.3 126-38 3.875 98.4 120-38 2.468 62.6
10.5-11.6 24-19 3.812 96.8 1.968 49.9 36-49 7.125 180.9
20/40-19 .984 24.9 126-40 4.000 101.6 80-40 2.985 75.8
8-5/8 219.0
40/80-26 1.968 49.9 128-38 3.875 98.4 120-38 2.468 62.6
32-26 2.688 68.2 24-36 7.500 190.5
PERMANENT PACKER
41/81-26 1.750 44.4 128-40 4.000 101.6 80-40 2.985 75.8
18-21.4 32-25 3.968 100.7 2.500 63.5 20-25 1.865 47.3 192-47 3.875 98.4
21-19 1.312 33.3 194-47 4.750 120.6 190-47 3.000 76.2
SYSTEMS
5 127.0 32-19 1.968 49.9
20/40-19 .984 24.9 191-47 2.500 63.5
9-5/8 244.4 36-53.5 8.125 206.3
40/80-26 1.968 49.9 194-40 4.000 101.6 80-40 2.985 75.8
34-26 2.688 68.2
11.5-13 41/81-26 1.750 44.4 60/80-32 2.406 61.1
194-32 3.250 82.5
34-25 4.250 107.9 2.500 63.5 20-25 1.865 47.3 61/81-32 1.990 50.5
21-19 1.312 33.3 192-47 3.875 98.4
23-26.8 34-19 1.968 49.9
20/40-19 .984 24.9 194-47 4.750 120.6 190-47 3.000 76.2
40/80-26 1.968 49.9 191-47 2.500 63.5
42-26 2.688 68.2 9-7/8 250.1 62.8 8.125 206.3
41/81-26 1.750 44.4 194-40 4.000 101.6 80-40 2.985 75.8
20-23 4.328 109.9
21-19 1.312 33.3 60/80-32 2.406 61.1
5-1/2 139.7 42-19 1.968 49.9 194-32 3.250 82.5
20/40-19 .984 24.9 61/81-32 1.990 50.5
40/80-26 1.968 49.9 190-47 3.000 76.2
44-26 2.688 68.2
41/81-26 1.750 44.4 212-47 4.750 120.6 191-47 or 2.500 63.5
14-17 4.500 114.3 192-47
21-19 1.312 33.3 60.7-79.2 9.000 228.6 3.875 98.4
44-19 1.968 49.9
20/40-19 .984 24.9 80-32 or 2.406 61.1
212-32 3.250 82.5
60/80-32 2.406 61.1 10-3/4 81-32 1.990 50.5
24-32 81-32 5.350 135.8 273.0
61/81-32 1.990 50.5 ⊕∆ 3.000 76.2
3.250 82.5 190-47
60/80-32 2.406 61.1 214-47 4.750 120.6 191-47 or 2.500 63.5
82-32 192-47
61/81-32 1.990 50.5 32.75-60.7 9.437 239.7 3.875 98.4
20-32 5.468 138.8
40/80-26 1.968 49.9 80-32 or 2.406 61.1
6-5/8 168.2 82-26 2.688 68.2 214-32 3.250 82.5
41/81-26 1.750 44.4 81-32 1.990 50.5
60/80-32 2.406 61.1 190-47 3.000 76.2
84-32 3.250 82.5
61/81-32 1.990 50.5 220-47 4.750 120.6 191-47 or 2.500 63.5
20 5.687 144.4 11-3/4 192-47
40/80-26 1.968 49.9 298.4 42-60 10.437 265.1 3.875 98.4
84-26 2.688 68.2 ⊕∆
41/81-26 1.750 44.4 80-32 or 2.406 61.1
220-32 3.250 82.5
53.60- 42/62-30 2.375 60.3 81-32 1.990 50.5
64-30 4.937 125.40 3.000 76.2
57.10 40/60-30 1.970 50.0 230-60 6.000 152.4 190-60 4.875 123.8
60/80-32 2.406 61.1 190-47 3.000 76.2
38-46.4 81-32 5.350 135.8
61/81-32 1.990 50.5 230-47 4.750 120.6 191-47 or 2.500 63.5
3.250 82.5 61-72 11.562 293.6 192-47
60/80-32 2.406 61.1 3.875 98.4
82-32
61/81-32 1.990 50.5 80-32 or 2.406 61.1
32-42.7 5.468 138.8 230-32 3.250 82.5
40/80-26 1.968 49.9 13-3/8 81-32 1.990 50.5
82-26 2.688 68.2 ⊕∆
339.7
41/81-26 1.750 44.4 240-60 6.000 152.4 190-60 4.875 123.8
60/80-32 2.406 61.1 190-47 3.000 76.2
7 177.8 84-32 3.250 82.5
61/81-32 1.990 50.5 240-47 4.750 120.6 191-47 or 2.500 63.5
23-32 5.687 144.4 48-72 12.000 304.8
40/80-26 1.968 49.9 192-47 3.875 98.4
84-26 2.688 68.2
41/81-26 1.750 44.4 80-32 or
240-32 3.250 82.5 2.406 61.1
60/80-32 2.406 61.1 81-32
20-29 86-32 5.875 149.2 3.250 82.5 ! For information on packer or accessory sizes not found in this specification guide, refer
61/81-32 1.990 50.5
to Baker Oil Tools' Packer Systems Technical Manual or contact your Baker Oil Tools
60/80-32 2.406 61.1 Representative.
88-32 6.187 157.1 3.250 82.5
61/81-32 1.990 50.5 #Tubing seal assemblies, tubing seal and spacer nipples.
17-20
40/80-26 1.968 49.9 " Includes some drillpipe and line pipe weights.
88-26 6.187 157.1 2.688 68.2
41/81-26 1.750 44.4 & When proposed for use in other than the casing weight shown, contact your Baker Oil
60/80-32 2.406 61.1 Tools Representative.
45.3-51.2 86-32 5.875 149.2 3.250 82.5
61/81-32 1.990 50.5 ‡ Minimum bore applicable to standard Models G, E and K Seal Assemblies only. Not
60/80-32 2.406 61.1 applicable to Models L, M, and N Seal Assemblies with K-RYTE and R-RYTE Seals
88-32 6.187 157.1 3.250 82.5 which may have reduced ID’s.
61/81-32 1.990 50.5
7-5/8 193.6 33.7-39 ' In 4-1/2" (114.3 mm) OD 11.6 lb/ft and heavier casing, the size 20 Wireline Pressure
40/80-26 1.968 49.9
88-26 6.187 157.1 2.688 68.2 Setting Assembly is too large and the size 10 WLPSA must be used. In 4-1/2"
41/81-26 1.750 44.4 (114.3 mm) 9.5 and 10.5 lb/ft casing, either the size 10 or 20 WLPSA may be used.
60/80-32 2.406 61.1 ⊕ Packers for Sizes 10-3/4" (273.0 mm) and larger casing should be run and set on a
24-33.7 92-32 6.375 161.9 3.250 82.5
61/81-32 1.990 50.5 hydraulic setting tool. Product Family Nos. H41370, H41371, H741372, H41570,
H41572, H41574 or H43712.
∆ Packers for these sizes of casing are also available with other size seal bores on special
order.
51
Rev., April, 2003
MODEL DA™ AND DAB™ APPLICATIONS

RETAINER • Production, injection and zonal
isolation
PRODUCTION PACKER • Sump packer
Product Family Nos. H41514, • Squeeze or test packer
H41508, H41526, and H41503
FEATURES/BENEFITS
DESCRIPTION • Permanent or temporary bridge
plug
The Model DA Retainer Production • Solid, slim-line construction and a
Packer provides all the versatility packing element system that
and high performance characteris- resists swab-off. This provides a
tics of the Model D, with the differ- 50% faster run-in time without fear
ence being that the DA has a larger of impact damage or premature
sealing bore at the upper end. The setting, yet packs off securely and
DA Packer is frequently used in permanently when the packer is
complex multiple-string comple- set
tions or when large tubing is run and • Two opposed sets of full-circle, full
it is necessary to maintain clear- strength slips assure that the
ance through the packer or seal nip- packer will stay where it is set
ple compatible with the tubing ID. • Unique interlocked, expanded
The Model DAB Packer is distin- metal back-up rings contact the
guished from the Model DA by the casing and create a positive bar-
DAB's threaded (box or pin) bottom rier to packing element extrusion
guide. This DAB Guide can be • Typically have increased rating
specified for acceptance of a Millout over similar size D or DB Packer
Extension, Seal Bore Extension or when accessory seals are landed
virtually any component desired. in alternate bore
Model DA Packers and their guides • Aflas packing element is available
can also be ordered separately by in select casing weight ranges
those interested in maximum inven-
tory flexibility.
ACCESSORIES
Packer Plugging Devices (page 140)
Packer Sealing Systems (page 118)
Packer Extensions (page 146)
of the Model DA Packers (see page
12). Parallel Flow Systems (page 139)
Model DAB Retainer Production Packer

52
DA RETAINER PRODUCTION PACKER,

PRODUCT FAMILY NOS. H41503, H41508, H41514, AND H41526
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Packer Sealing Bore
Casing Packer &
Upper Lower (
Max Seal Seal Min Bore Seal Min Bore
OD Weight # Seal Bore ‡
OD Size " Bore Assembly Thru Seals ∆ Assembly Thru Seals ∆
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm Size ' in. mm in. mm Size ' in. mm
11.6-15.1 3.593 91.2 22DA25 21-19 1.312 33.3
4-1/2! 114.3 2.500 63.5 20DA25 1.875 47.6 1.968 49.9 or or or
9.5-11.6 3.812 96.8 24DA25
20/40-19 0.984 24.9
20-23 4.328 109.9 42DA32 40DA/
5-1/2 139.7 3.250 82.5 2.500 63.5 2.688 68.2 40/80-26 1.968 49.9
14-17 4.500 114.3 44DA32 SA32
20-32 5.468 138.8 82DA40 60/80-32 2.406 61.1
80DA/
PERMANENT PACKER
6-5/8 168.2 4.000 101.6 3.250 82.5 3.250 82.5 or or or
20 5.687 144.4 84DA40 SA40
61/81-32 1.990 50.5
SYSTEMS
60DA36 3.000 76.2 42/62-30 2.375 60.3
53.6-57.1 4.937 125.4 64DA36 3.625 92.0 or or or 3.000 76.2 or or or
61DA36 2.875 73.0 40/60-30 1.968 49.9
7 177.8
32-42.7 5.468 138.8 82DA40
23-32 5.687 144.4 84DA40 60/80-32 2.406 61.1
17-20 80DA/
6.187 157.1 88DA40 4.000 101.6 3.250 82.5 3.250 82.5 or or or
33.7-39 SA40
7-5/8 193.6
24-33.7 6.375 161.9 92DA40 61/81-32 1.990 50.5
7-3/4 196.9 46.1-48.6 6.187 157.1 88DA40
36-49 7.125 180.9 126DA47 82FA47 ⊕ 4.000 101.6
8-5/8 219.0 4.750 120.6 or or or 3.875 98.4 120-38 2.468 82.5
24-36 7.500 190.5 128DA47
81FA47 3.875 98.4
192-47 3.875 98.4
9-5/8 244.4 36-53.5 190-47 3.000 76.2
191-47 2.500 63.5
8.125 206.3 194DA60 6.000 152.4 190DA60 4.875 123.8 4.750 120.6
192-47 3.875 98.4
9-7/8 250.1 62.8 190-47 3.000 76.2
191-47 2.500 63.5
! In 4-1/2" (114.3 mm) OD 11.6 lb and heavier casing the size 20 wireline pressure setting assembly is to large and the size 10 WLPSA MUST BE USED.
In 4-1/2" (114.3 mm) OD 9.5 and 10.5 lb casing, either the size 10 or 20 WLPSA may be used.
# Includes some drillpipe and line pipe weights.
" When proposed for use in other than the casing weight range shown contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative.
& For information on packer or accessory sizes not found in this specification guide refer to Baker Oil Tools' Packer Systems Technical Manual or your Baker
Oil Tools Representative.
‡ The maximum OD (including tolerance) of any part run through a Baker production packer should be at least 1/16" (1.59 mm) smaller than the minimum bore
through the packer body. This may occasionally require that the coupling OD’s be turned down.
' Tubing seal assemblies, tubing seal and spacer nipples.
( Lower bore can be utilized as a seal bore, HOWEVER, strict dimensional analysis for compatibility of packer bore/seal accessory configuration is required
to assure desired performance. Compatibility is based on lower bore/seal nipple diametrical dimensions only. Final seating position of locating shoulder will
vary between packer sizes. Anchor mechanisms or not recommended.
⊕ Accessory size 82FA47 replaces both previous sizes 80FA47 and 120DA47.
∆ ID listed is for commonly used G-22, E-22 and K-22 Seal Assemblies.
53
MODEL F-1™ AND FEATURES/BENEFITS

FB-1™ RETAINER • Solid, slim-line construction and a
packing element system that
PRODUCTION PACKER resists swab-off. This provides a
Product Family Nos. H41306, faster run-in time without fear of
H41308, and H41340 impact damage or premature set-
ting, yet packs off securely and
DESCRIPTION permanently when the packer is
Baker Model F-1 and FB-1 Retainer set
Production Packers are the “big • Two opposed sets of full-circle, full
bore” versions of the popular Model strength slips assure that the
D Retainer Production Packer. packer will stay where it is set
They combine the features of the D • Unique interlocked, expandable
with the largest bore through any metal back-up rings contact the
drillable packer. In the FB-1 ver- casing and create a positive bar-
sion, a Millout Extension, Seal Bore rier to packing element extension
Extension or other component can • The largest possible opening
be run below the packer. through a drillable packer
Model F-1 and FB-1 Packers and • Aflas packing element is available
their guides can also be ordered in select casing weight ranges
separately by those interested in
maximum inventory flexibility. ACCESSORIES
Packer Plugging Devices (page 140)
of the Model D Packers (see page Packer Extensions (page 146)
12). Parallel Flow Systems (page 139)
APPLICATIONS
isolation
• Sump packer
• Permanent or temporary bridge
plug
Model FB-1 Retainer Production Packer

54
F-1 RETAINER PRODUCTION PACKER,

PRODUCT FAMILY NOS. H41306, H41308 AND H41340
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer & Seal Assembly #
Max Seal Min Bore
OD Weight !
Size ‡ OD Bore ' Size Thru Seals ⊕
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm in. mm
11.6-15.1 22-23 3.593 91.2 20-23 1.703 43.2
4-1/2 " 114.3 2.390 60.7
9.5-11.6 24-23 3.718 94.4 21-23 1.807 45.9
24.1 22-23 3.593 91.2 20-23 1.703 43.2
5 127.0 2.390 60.7
21.4-24.1 24-23 3.718 94.4 21-23 1.807 45.9
20-23 43-30 4.437 112.7 42/62-30 2.375 60.3
5-1/2 139.7 14-17 45-30 4.562 115.8 3.000 76.2 or or or
PERMANENT PACKER
14 47-30 4.750 120.6 40/60-30 1.970 50.0
20-24 83-40 5.687 144.4
SYSTEMS
6-5/8 168.2
17 85-40 5.875 149.2
32-38 83-40 5.687 144.4
26-32 85-40 5.875 149.2
7 177.8
20-23 87-40 6.000 152.4 4.000 101.6 80-40 2.985 75.8
17-20
89-40 ( 6.250 158.7
33.7-42.8
7-5/8 193.6
24-33.7 91-40 ( 6.500 165.1
7-3/4 196.9 46.1-48.6 89-40 6.250 158.7
40-58.4 192-60 8.218 208.4
9-5/8 244.4
36-47 194-60 8.438 214.3 6.000 152.4 190-60 4.875 123.8
9-7/8 250.1 62.8 192-60 8.218 208.4
13-3/8 339.7 61-72 240-93 11.625 295.2 9.375 238.1 240-93 7.995 203.0
! Includes some drillpipe and line pipe weights.
# Tubing seal assemblies, tubing seal and spacer nipples.
" In 4-1/2" (114.3 mm) OD 11.6 lb and heavier casing the size 20 wireline pressure setting assembly is too large and the size 10
WLPSA MUST BE USED. In 4-1/2" (114.3 mm) OD 9.5 and 10.5 lb casing, either the size 10 or 20 WLPSA may be used.
& For information on packer or accessory sizes not found in this specification guide refer to Baker Oil Tools' Packer Systems Technical
Manual or your Baker Oil Tools Representative.
‡ When proposed for use in other than the casing weight range shown contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative.
' The maximum OD (including tolerance) of any part run through a Baker Production Packer should be at least 1/16" (1.59 mm) smaller
than the minimum bore through the packer body. This may occasionally require that the coupling OD’s be turned down.
( Size 89-40 and 91-40 packers can be ordered with a lower pressure rating and an enlarged 4.400" (111.8 mm) inch seal bore
diameter.
⊕ ID listed is for commonly used G-22 or E-22 Seal Assemblies.

MODEL FA™, FAB™, FEATURES/BENEFITS

FA-1™ AND FAB-1™ • Permanent or temporary bridge
plug
RETAINER
• Solid, slim-line construction and a
PRODUCTION PACKER packing element system that
Product Family Nos. H41307, resists swab-off. This provides a
H41309, and H41341 fast run-in time without fear of
impact damage or premature set-
DESCRIPTION ting, yet packs off securely and
Baker's Model FA-1 Retainer Pro- permanently when the packer is
duction Packer is the “big bore” ver- set
sion of the popular and time tested • Two opposed sets of full-circle, full
Baker Model DA Packer. In addi- strength slips assure that the
tion, the FA-1 features an extended packer will stay where it is set
upper body to make room for a still • Unique interlocked, expandable
larger upper seal bore. This result is metal back-up rings contact the
the largest possible ID through the casing and create a positive bar-
accessory and the packer. In its rier to packing element extrusion
smaller sizes (see specification • Largest possible bore through the
guide), this packer is available as packer with accessory seals
the Model FA which has the body located in alternate bore
lock ring and setting sleeve on the • Typically have increased rating
lower end of the packer. over similar size F-1 or FB-1 when
accessory seals are landed in
The Model FAB and the FAB-1 Re-
alternate bore
tainer Production Packers provide a
• Aflas packing element is available
threaded bottom guide for attach-
in select casing weight ranges
ment of a Millout Extension, Seal
Bore Extension or other component ACCESSORIES
below the packer. Model FA-1 Packer Plugging Devices (page 140)
Packers and their guides can also
be ordered separately by those in-
terested in maximum inventory flex- Packer Extensions (page 146)
ibility. Parallel Flow Systems (page 139)

of the Model FA Packers (see page
12).
APPLICATION
isolation
• Sump packer
Model FA-1 Retainer Production Packer

56
FA AND FAB RETAINER PRODUCTION PACKER,

PRODUCT FAMILY NOS. H41302 AND H41305
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer " Packer Sealing Bore
Upper Lower ⊕
Max
OD Weight ! Seal Seal Min Bore Seal Min Bore
Size # OD Accessory
Bore Assembly Thru Seals ) Bore ' Thru Seals )
Size (
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm Size ( in. mm in. mm in. mm
2-3/8 60.3 4.6-5.1 023FA12 1.750 44.4 1.250 31.7 020FA12 0.750 19.0 - - - - -
2-7/8 73.0 6.4-6.5 028FA18 2.220 56.3 1.875 47.6 020FA18 1.250 31.7 1.250 31.7 020FA12 0.750 19.0
12.7-13.3 033FA20 2.562 65.0
3-1/2 88.9 2.062 52.3 030FA20 1.421 34.9 1.531 28.8 030FA15 1.000 25.4
7.7-9.3 035FA20 2.765 70.2
12.6-14 13FA25 ‡ 3.062 77.7
4 101.6 2.500 63.5 11FA25 1.875 47.6 1.875 47.6 11-18 1.000 25.4
9.5-11.6 15FA25 ‡ 3.187 80.9
11.6-15.1 22FA30 3.609 91.6 21-23 or 1.807 or 45.9 or
4-1/2 ∆ 114.3 3.000 76.2 20FA/SA30 2.390 60.7 2.390 60.7
20-23 1.703
PERMANENT PACKER
9.5-11.6 24FA30 3.718 94.4 43.2
5 127.0 See Model FA-1 Specification Guide
42/62-30 2.375
SYSTEMS
40FA/SA36 or 60.3
5-1/2 139.7 20-23.8 43FA36 4.437 112.7 3.625 92.0 3.000 76.2 3.000 76.2
60DA36 40/60-30 1.970 50.0
See Model FA-1 Specification Guide
For Sizes 5" (127.0 mm) 15-21 lb/ft and larger, ID Casing
FA-1 AND FAB-1 RETAINER PRODUCTION PACKER,

SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer " Packer Sealing Bore
Upper Lower ⊕
Max
OD Weight ! Seal Min Bore Seal Min Bore
Size OD Seal Assembly Thru Seals ) Accessory
Bore Bore ' Thru Seals )
Size ( Size (
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
See Model FA Specification Guide
For Size 4-1/2" (114.3 mm) and Smaller
5 127.0 15-21
32FA30 3.968 100.7 3.000 76.2 20FA/SA30 2.390 60.7 2.500 63.5 20-25 1.865 47.3
5-1/2 139.7 32.3-35.3
40FA/SA36
or
14-17 45FA36 4.562 115.8 3.000 76.2
60DA36 42/62-30 2.375 60.3
5-1/2 139.7 3.625 92.0 or 3.000 76.2 or or or
41FA/SA36 40/60 1.970 50.0
13-14 47FA36 4.750 120.6 or 2.875 73.0
61DA36
20-24 83FA47 5.687 144.4
6-5/8 168.2
17 85FA47 5.875 149.2 82FA47 4.000 101.6
32-38 83FA47 5.687 144.4 4.750 120.6 or or or 4.000 101.6 80-40 2.985 75.8
26-32 85FA47 5.875 149.2 81FA47 3.875 98.4
7 177.8
20-23 87FA47 6.000 152.4
17-20
89FA52 6.250 158.7
33.7-42.8
7-5/8 193.6 5.250 133.3 80FA/SA52 4.462 113.3 4.400 111.7 80-44 3.484 88.4
24-33.7 91FA52 6.500 165.1
7-3/4 196.9 45.1-48.6 89FA52 6.250 158.7
9-5/8 244.4 36-47 194FA75 8.438 214.3 7.500 190.5 190FA75 6.031 153.1 6.000 152.4 190-60 4.875 123.8
10-3/4 273.0 60.7-79.2 212FA75 9.000 228.6 7.500 190.5 190FA75 6.031 153.1 6.000 152.4 190-60 4.875 123.8
Seals Not
13-3/8 339.7 54.5-80.7 240FA1025 11.975 301.6 10.250 260.3 190FA1025 - - 8.625 219.0 - -
Available
# When proposed for use in other than the casing weight range shown contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative.
" For information on packers or accessory sizes not found in this specification guide, refer to your Baker Oil Tools' Packer Systems Technical Manual or your Baker Oil Tools
Representative.
‡ Does not contain a left-hand thread unless ordered.
' The maximum OD (including tolerance) of any part run through a Baker Production Packer should be at least 1/16" (1.59 mm) smaller than the minimum bore through the packer body.
This may occasionally require that the coupling OD’s be turned down.
( Tubing seal assemblies, tubing seal and spacer nipples.
⊕ Lower bore can be utilized as a seal bore, HOWEVER, strict dimensional analysis for compatibility of packer bore/sealing accessory configuration is required to assure desired
performance. Compatibility is based on lower bore/seal nipple diametrical dimensions only. Final seating position of locating shoulder will vary between packer sizes. Anchor
mechanisms are not recommended.
∆ In 4-1/2" (114.3 mm) OD 11.6 lb and heavier casing the size 20 Wireline Pressure Setting Assembly is too large and the size 10 WLPSA MUST BE USED. In 4-1/2" (114.3 mm) OD
9.5 and 10.5 lb casing, either the size 10 or 20 WLPSA may be used.
)ID listed is for commonly used G-22, E-22 or K-22 Seal Assemblies.

Rev., April, 2003
MODEL FB-3™ HIGH thus limit the transmission of com-

pression into the packer.
PRESSURE RETAINER
PRODUCTION PACKER The seal bore sizes have been opti-
mized to be compatible with large
Product Family No. H41350 diameter TCP guns, allowing re-
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION moval after firing.
The Baker Model FB-3 High Pres- PERFORM Packer Performance

sure Retainer Production Packer is Envelopes are available for all sizes
designed for deep well tests where of the Model FB-3 Packers (see
high hydrostatic annulus pressures page 12).
may be encountered. The most
FEATURES/BENEFITS
common use of this packer is in
high pressure DST completions, • Packers rated for differential pres-
where possible evacuation of tubing sures up to 15,000 psi dependent
fluids during perforating induce ex- on size
treme loads on packers. • Largest possible opening through
packer for high pressure applica-
These packers differ from the con- tions
ventional FB-1 Packers in that they
• Uniquely designed sealing ele-
have non-sealing bores. Seal Bore
ment eliminates need for wire
Extensions attached below the
mesh in extreme applications
packer will function as the tubing to
packer sealing device, while the • One piece body with premium
packer effects the casing seal and thread down for Seal Bore Exten-
supports the induced loads. sion enhances reliability
• Standard slips will grip V-150 cas-
In cases of extreme annulus pres- ing
sure from above, the seal assembly
• May be set with standard wireline
may be spaced-out to prevent con-
or drillpipe setting tools
tact with the locating shoulder, and
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Lower Sealing
OD Weight OD
Size # Bore ID
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm
5 127.0 26.7 22-23 3.594 91.2 2.390 60.7
42.7 82-38 5.500 139.7 3.875 98.4
83-36 3.625 92.0
7 177.8 32-41 ! !
83-40
26 87-40 6.000 152.4
51.2 -55.3 85-40 5.875 149.2
4.000 101.6
7-5/8 193.7 47.1 87-40 6.000 152.4
39
89-40 ! !
7-3/4 196.9 46.1
! Contact your local Baker Oil Tools Representative for packer OD.
# When proposed for use in other than the casing weight range shown, contact your Baker Oil
Tools Representative.
NOTE: Contact your local Baker Oil Tools Representative for information regarding pressure
and temperature ratings, and elastomer availability.
Model FB-3 High Pressure
Retainer Production Packer
58
MODEL HE™ AND HEA™ made up. This high torque connec-
tion ensures proper alignment, re-
RETAINER PRODUCTION sists back off and has been
PACKER successfully gas tested to 15,000
Product Family Nos. H42101 psi.
and H42103 PERFORM Packer Performance
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION Envelopes are available for all sizes
of the Model HE and HEA Packers
The Baker Models HE and HEA Re- (see page 12).
tainer Production Packers have
been developed for use in high tem- FEATURES/BENEFITS
perature, hostile well environments • Maximum operating pressure dif-
where they may be subjected to ferential is normally 15,000 psi
very high pressure differentials. (103.35 MPa). Note however,
PERMANENT PACKER
Available with Aflas and Viton pack- some packer sizes may be
ing elements and metal back-up restricted to lower pressure differ-
SYSTEMS
rings for compatibility with the most entials, others may be rated
severe environments including Bro- higher
mides, H2S, CO2 and Amine inhibi- • Packing element is chemically
tors. The HEA features an enlarged inert to hostile well environments
upper seal bore to maximize ID (H2S, CO2, inhibitors)
through the completion. • Unaffected by temperature
The Model HE Packer’s Seal Bore cycling
Extensions and Seal Bore Exten- • Packer body available with spe-
sion Crossover Subs utilize a special alloy as required
cially developed metal-to-metal • Metal-to-metal sealing eliminates
“crush-ring” connection which forms o-ring seals
an impermeable metal seal when
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
T&C Packer Min Bore Thru Diameter of
OD
Weight ! Model Size ! Max OD Packer Body Sealing Body
10.5-12.6 HEA 375-26 x 19 3.750 95.3 1.929 49.0
4-1/2 114.3
9.5-10.5 HE 381-26 3.812 96.8 2.688 68.3
23.2-24.2 HEA 375-26 x 19 3.750 95.3 1.919 48.7
23.2 HE 381-26 3.812 96.8 2.688 68.3
2.688 68.3
HE 396-26
5 127.0 18-21.4 3.968 100.8
HEA 396-26 x 19 1.919 48.7
HE 425-26 2.688 68.3
11.5-15 4.250 108.0
HEA 425-30 x 22 2.265 57.5 3.000 76.2
HE 396-26 2.688 68.3
32.3-35.3 3.968 100.8
HEA 396-26 x 19 1.919 48.7 2.688 68.3
5-1/2 139.7
HE 425-26 2.688 68.3
23-28.4 4.250 108.0
HEA 425-30 x 22 2.265 57.5 3.000 76.2
32-35 535-32 5.350 135.9
6-5/8 168.3
23.2-32 546-32 5.468 138.9
HE 3.250 82.6 3.250 82.6
44-49.5 535-32 5.350 135.9
7 177.8
35-45.4 546-32 5.468 138.9
! When proposed for use in other than the casing weight range shown, contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative.
Model HEA Retainer Production Packer


MODEL SB-3™ the problems of spacing out, land-

ing, etc.
HYDRO-SET RETAINER
• All o-rings supported by back-up
PRODUCTION PACKER rings to improve long term seal
Product Family No. H40906 integrity
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION • SB-3 Packers are designed to
withstand pressure differential up
Baker’s Model SB-3 Retainer Pro- to 10,000 psi
duction Packer is the hydraulically • B Guide furnished standard allow-
set version of the Model DB Packer. ing attaching of a millout extension
The SB-3 is a hydraulically set, one- or other component below the
trip completion packer. packer. A blank bottom guide or
PERFORM Packer Performance guide for seal bore extension can
Envelopes are available for all sizes be furnished if required
of the Model SB-3 Packers (see • All alloy materials within the
page 12). packer are suitable for H2S service
FEATURES/BENEFITS • The seal assembly on which the
packer is run serves as a seal nip-
ple after the packer is set, provid-
ing a single run completion
resists swab-off. This provides
fast run-in time without fear of • Test fixtures permit high pressure
impact damage or premature set- surface testing of o-ring seals and
ting, yet packs off securely and tailpipe connections
permanently when the packer is • Packer also available in S-3 (box x
set pin) configuration by special order
• Two opposed sets of full-circle, PACKER ACCESSORIES
full strength slips assure that the
packer will stay where it is set Sealing Systems (pages 118-128)
Expansion Joints (pages 131-133)
• Unique interlocked, expandable
metal back-up rings contact the Parallel Flow Systems (page 139)
casing and create a positive bar- Plugging Devices (page 140)
rier to packing element extrusion Packer Extension (page 146)
• Safety of flanged up completions
• Setting requires no rotation or
reciprocation, thereby eliminating
Model “SB-3” Retainer Production

Packer with “B” Guide for
Millout Extension
Product Family No. H40906 (Nitrile)
Product Family No. H40924 (Aflas)
60
SB-3 HYDRO-SET RETAINER PRODUCTION PACKER, PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H40906

SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer " Standard Seal Assembly
Seal Min Bore
OD Weight ! OD
Size # Bore Size Thru Seals ‡
21-19 1.312 33.3
5 127.0 15-21 32-19 3.968 100.7 1.968 49.9
20-19 0.984 24.9
5-1/2 139.7 13-17 44-25 4.500 114.3 2.500 63.5 20-25 1.865 47.3
17-32 82-32 5.468 138.8
6-5/8 168.2
17-20 84-32 5.687 144.4
32-38 82-32 5.468 138.8
80-32 2.406 61.1
7 177.8 20-32 84-32 5.687 144.4
3.250 82.5 or or or
PERMANENT PACKER
17-20
88-32 6.187 157.1 81-32 1.990 50.5
33.7-39
SYSTEMS
7-5/8 193.6
24-33.7 92-32 6.375 161.9
7-3/4 196.9 46.1-48.6 88-32 6.187 157.1
8-5/8 219.0 24-36 128-40 7.500 190.5 4.000 101.6 80/120-40 3.000 76.2
190-47 3.000 76.2
194-47 8.125 206.3 4.750 120.6 191-47 2.500 63.5
9-5/8 244.4 32.3-53.5
192-47 3.875 98.4
194-60! 8.250 209.5 6.150 156.2 190-60 4.875 123.8
190-47 3.000 76.2
194-47 8.125 206.3 4.750 120.6 191-47 2.500 63.5
9-7/8 250.1 62.8
192-47 3.875 98.4
194-60! 8.250 209.5 6.150 156.2 190-60 4.875 123.8
# When proposed for use in other than the casing weight range shown, contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative.
" For information on packer or accessory sizes not found in this specification guide refer to Baker Oil Tools' Packer Systems Technical
Manual or your Baker Oil Tools Representative.
‡ ID listed is for commonly used G-22 and E-22 for assemblies.
61
MODEL SAB-3™ AND fast run-in time (when compared

to earlier model permanent pack-
SABL-3™ HYDRO-SET ers) without fear of impact damage
RETAINER PRODUCTION or premature setting, yet packs off
PACKER securely and permanently when
the packer is set
Product Family Nos. H40907
• Two opposed sets of full-circle, full
and H40908
strength slips assure that the
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION packer will stay where it is set
• Unique interlocked, expandable
Baker’s Models SAB-3 and SABL-3 metal back-up rings contact the
Retainer Production Packers are the casing and create a positive bar-
hydraulically set versions of the rier to packing element extrusion
Model DAB and FAB Packers re- • Safety of flanged up completions
spectively. These SAB Packers fea- permits displacing tubing before
ture the largest possible bore setting packer
through combined packer and seal • Setting requires no rotation or
accessory. The SAB Packer is run reciprocation, thereby eliminating
to depth, connected to the tubing the problems of spacing out, land-
with a Model K or KC Anchor Tubing ing, etc.
Seal Nipple, and is set by applied • All o-rings are supported by back-
tubing pressure. This makes the up rings to improve long term seal
packer ideal for use in high angle integrity
deviated wells common in offshore • SAB-3 Packers are designed to
operations. withstand pressure differentials up
The SAB-3 Packers and SABL-3 to 10,000 psi
Packers are developments of the • SABL-3 Packers are designed to
popular SAB Packers, which have withstand pressure differentials up
been redesigned to give maximum to 7,500 psi
strength, uniformity of setting pres- • B Guide furnished as standard
sure and standardization of all alloy allowing attaching of a millout
materials for H2S service. extension, seal bore extension or
other component below the packer
The SAB-3 Packers offer bores • One piece alloy steel body which
comparable to the DA Packers in meets NACE standard MR-01-75-
their corresponding sizes. 88 for H2S service
The SABL-3 (large bore) Packers • Optional test fixtures permit high
offer larger bores more comparable pressure testing of anchor tubing
to the FA Packers and as a result seal nipple, packer and tailpipe
carry a lower pressure rating than before running in well
the SAB-3 Packer. The SABL-3
PACKER ACCESSORIES
Packers are only available in certain
popular sizes at this time. Sealing Systems (pages 118-128)
Expansion Joints (pages 131-133)
Parallel Flow Systems (page 139)
Envelopes are available for all size
Model SAB-3 and SABL-3 Packers Plugging Devices (page 140)
(see page 12). Packer Extensions (page 146)
FEATURES/BENEFITS
Models SAB-3 and SABL-3 Hydro-Set
resists swab-off. This provides a
with B Guide
Product Family Nos. H40907 & H40908
Product Family Nos. H40928 & H40926 (Aflas)
62
SAB-3 HYDRO-SET RETAINER PRODUCTION PACKER, PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H40907

SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer ! Packer Sealing Bore
Upper Lower "
Max
OD Weight # Seal Seal Min Bore Seal Seal Min Bore
Size & OD
Bore Assembly Thru Seals Bore Assembly Thru Seals
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm Size in. mm in. mm Size in. mm
20-19 .984 24.9
5 127.0 15-21 32SAB30 x 19 3.968 100.7 3.000 76.2 20FA30 2.390 60.7 1.968 49.9
21-19 1.312 33.3
5-1/2 139.7 13-17 44SAB32 x 25 4.500 114.3 3.250 82.5 40DA32 2.500 63.5 2.500 63.5 20-25 1.865 47.3
17-32 82SAB40 x 32 5.468 138.8
6-5/8 168.2
17-20 84SAB40 x 32 5.687 144.4
32-44 82SAB40 x 32 5.468 138.8
7 177.8 20-32 84SAB40 x 32 5.687 144.4
4.000 101.3 80DA40 3.250 82.5 3.250 82.5 80-32 2.406 61.1
17-20
88SAB40 x 32 6.187 157.1
33.7-39
PERMANENT PACKER
7-5/8 193.6
24-39 92SAB40 x 32 6.375 161.9
7-3/4 196.9 46.1-48.6 88SAB40 6.187 157.1
SYSTEMS
8-5/8 219.0 24-36 128SAB47 x 40 7.500 190.5 4.750 120.6 81FA47 3.875 98.4 4.000 101.6 80/120-40 3.000 76.2
191-47 2.500 63.5
194SAB60 x 47 4.750 120.6 190-47 3.000 76.2
9-5/8 244.4 32.3-58.4 8.125 206.3 6.000 152.4 190DA60 4.875 123.8
192-47 3.875 98.4
194SAB60 x 48 4.895 ‡ 124.3 - - -
191-47 2.500 63.5
194SAB60 x 47 4.750 120.6 190-47 3.000 76.2
9-7/8 250.1 62.8 8.125 206.3 6.000 152.4 190DA60 4.875 123.8
192-47 3.875 98.4
194SAB60 x 48 4.895 ‡ 124.3 - - -
! For information on packer or accessory sizes not found in this specification guide, refer to Baker Oil Tools' Packer Systems Technical Manual or your Baker Oil Tools
Representative.
" Lower bore can be utilized as a seal bore; HOWEVER, strict dimensional analysis for compatibility of packer bore/sealing accessory configuration is required to assure
desired performance. Compatibility is based on lower bore/seal nipple diametrical dimensions only. Final seating position of locating shoulder will vary between packer
sizes. Anchor mechanisms are not recommended.
& When proposed for use in other than the casing weight range shown, contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative.
‡ This is not a honed seal bore.
SABL-3 HYDRO-SET RETAINER PRODUCTION PACKER, PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H40908

SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Upper Lower "
Max
OD Weight # Seal Seal Min Bore Seal Seal Min Bore
Size & OD
Bore Assembly Thru Seals Bore Assembly Thru Seals
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm Size in. mm in. mm Size in. mm
5-1/2 139.7 20-23
43SABL36 x 27 4.450 113.0 3.625 92.0 43SA36 2.780 70.6 2.780 ‡ 70.6 - - -
6-5/8 168.2 17
85SABL47 x 38 4.750 120.6 81FA47 3.875 98.4 3.875 98.4 120-38 2.500 63.5
5.875 149.2
7 177.8 26-29
85SABL48 x 4.145 4.875 123.8 80DA48 4.125 104.7 4.125 ‡ 104.7 - - -
7-5/8 193.6 24-33.7
91SABL47 x 38 6.500 165.1 4.750 120.6 81FA47 3.875 98.4 3.885 98.6 120-38 2.500 63.5
8-5/8 219.0 24-36
128SABL60 x 47 7.500 190.5 6.000 152.4 190DA60 4.875 123.8 4.750 120.6 190-47 3.000 76.2
194SABL75 x 60 7.500 190.5 190FA75 6.031 153.1 6.000 152.4 190-60 4.875 123.8
8.250 209.5
194SABL73 x 6.059 7.375 187.3 190-73 6.059 153.8 6.059 ‡ 153.8 - - -
9-5/8 244.4 47-58.4
194SABL40 x 32 4.000 101.6 80DA40 3.250 82.5 3.250 82.5 80-32 2.406 61.1
8.125 206.3
194SABL47 x 44 4.750 120.6 81FA47 3.875 98.4 4.400 111.7 80-44 3.500 88.9
194SABL75 x 60 7.500 190.5 190FA75 6.031 153.1 6.000 152.4 190-60 4.875 123.8
8.250 209.5
194SABL73 x 6.059 7.375 187.3 190-73 6.059 153.8 6.059 ‡ 153.8 - - -
9-7/8 250.1 62.8
194SABL40 x 32 4.000 101.6 80DA40 3.250 82.5 3.250 82.5 80-32 2.406 61.1
8.125 206.3
194SABL47 x 44 4.750 120.6 81FA47 3.875 98.4 4.400 111.7 80-44 3.500 88.9
10-3/4 273.0 32.75-60.7 214SABL75 x 60 9.437 239.7 7.500 190.5 190FA75 6.031 153.1 6.000 152.4 190-60 4.875 123.8
! For information on packer or accessory sizes not found in this specification guide, refer to Baker Oil Tools' Packer Systems Technical Manual or your Baker Oil Tools
Representative.
" Lower bore can be utilized as a seal bore; HOWEVER, strict dimensional analysis for compatibility of packer bore/sealing accessory configuration is required to assure
desired performance. Compatibility is based on lower bore/seal nipple diametrical dimensions only. Final seating position of locating shoulder will vary between packer
sizes. Anchor mechanisms are not recommended.
‡ This is not a honed seal bore.
63
MODEL SB-3H™ • Where well conditions prohibit

mechanically set packers or well
HYDROSTATIC/ intervention
HYDRAULIC RETAINER • Where setting time required to be
PRODUCTION PACKER kept to a minimum
• Where the entire well can be pres-
sured up against a liner top isola-
DESCRIPTION tion valve or is non-perforated
• Where there is high cost/risk
The Baker Model SB-3H Retainer
associated with running well inter-
Production Packer is a develop-
vention tools
ment of the field proven SB-3 Re-
tainer Production Packer. The tool FEATURES/BENEFITS
is a hybrid hydrostatic and hydraulic • Interventionless Actuation. As the
packer with the features and advan- tool is actuated by absolute pres-
tages of both designs. It features sure, no running tools or blanking
the same reliable packoff compo- plugs are required. Application of
nents as the SB-3 type tools. pressure to burst a rupture disc
The tool has a primary setting will set the tool. No additional
mechanism actuated by absolute equipment is required
well pressure, so it may be set with- • Secondary setting mechanism
out running a plug or packer setting independent of primary method.
tool. In the event the primary method is
unsuccessful, the packer may be
The secondary setting mechanism set as a hydraulic packer. This
is the standard hydraulic method mechanism is totally independent
running a plug in the packer tailpipe of the hydrostatic chambers
and pressurizing the tubing. • Two opposed sets of full circle, full
The Model SB-3H Packer has been strength slips ensure that the
developed for markets where re- packer will stay where it is set
mote actuation of the production • Interlocked, expandable metal
packer within a completion brings back-up rings contact the casing
added benefit and cost saving to the and create a positive barrier to
customer. This can be achieved by packing element extrusion
reducing rig and packer setting time • All alloy materials within the
and minimizing the risk associated packer are suitable for H2S ser-
with standard well intervention set- vice
ting methods. It also reduces the • The packer may also be activated
need for additional well services. using an optional Edge module by
pressure pulse telemetry (see
page 149)
Envelopes are available for Model
• Special interlock system prevents
SB-3H Packers (see page 12).
preset risk
APPLICATIONS
• Run as a sump packer where,
using coil tubing, it is difficult to
land a plug
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Max Min
Casing Weight Tubing
Size OD ID
7 196.9 23-32 85-38 5.875 149.2 3.835 97.4 4-1/2 114.3
Model SB-3H Hydrostatic/Hydraulic 194-47 8.250 209.6 4.750 120.7 5-1/2 139.7
Retainer Production Packer 9-5/8 244.5 47-53.5
194-60 8.330 211.6 6.000 152.4 7 177.8
194-47 8.250 209.6 4.750 120.7 5-1/2 139.7
9-7/8 250.1 62.8
194-60 8.330 211.6 6.000 152.4 7 177.8
64 Rev., September, 2001

MODEL SBT™ AND FEATURES/BENEFITS

SAB(L)T™ NO • Solid, slim-lined construction and a
packing element system which
DOWNSTROKE resists swab-off
HYDRAULIC SET • Interlock mechanism that will pre-
vent premature setting
RETAINER PRODUCTION • The packer contains full circle slips
PACKER for even load distribution into the
Product Family Nos. H40916, casing
H40917, and H40918 • Segmented slip design assures
accurate break-up values
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION • The packing element features a
The Baker Models SBT and SAB(L)T solid metal back-up system to pre-
are Hydraulic Set Retainer Produc- vent extrusion
PERMANENT PACKER
tion Packers that can be set with the • All o-rings which separate tubing
application of tubing pressure only. and annulus pressure, are sup-
SYSTEMS
These packers do not rely on the hy- ported by back-up rings to improve
draulic stretch of tubing to ensure long term seal integrity
that the packing element and slip • The central piston location maxi-
system are sufficiently energized. mizes the load exerted on the
The packer can therefore be used in packing element system and slips
applications where packer body trav- during setting
el, from tubing expansion, is not pos- • Rotationally locked during milling
sible. operations
• Guide furnished as standard,
This situation normally occurs in: allowing the attachment of other
• Stung in, set down, flanged up situ- equipment under the packer
ations • All components in the flow path
• In tandem completions where can be furnished in the customer's
packers are very close to one choice of material
another • Lower bore is commonly non-seal-
ing SAB(L)T
This packer is an addition to the
• SBT offered with box by pin con-
highly successful Baker Models SB-
nections and no sealing bore
3 and SAB(L)-3 Packers.
PERFORM Packer Performance En-
velopes are available for all SBT and
SAB(L)T Packers (see page 12).
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Upper
Max
OD Weight Sealing Seal Min Bore
Size OD
Bore Assembly Thru Seals
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm Size in. mm
84SABT40x32 5.886 149.5 4.000 101.6 80DA40 3.250 82.5
85SBT40 5.891 149.6 # # # # #
7 177.8 29-32
85SAB(L)T47x38
5.891 149.6 4.750 120.6 81FA47 3.875 98.4
85SAB(L)T47x40
194SBT47 ! ! # # # # #
194SABT47x38 ! ! 4.750 120.6 81FA47 3.875 98.4
9-5/8 244.4 47-53.5
194SABT60x47 ! ! 6.000 152.4 190DA60 4.875 123.8
194SAB(L)T73x6.059 ! ! 7.375 187.3 190-73 6.059 153.8
For use in casing sizes and weights other than those shown, contact your local Baker Oil Tools Representative.
! Contact your local Baker Oil Tools Representative for Packer OD. Baker Model SAB(L)T
# SBT packers are not supplied with a sealing bore. No Downstroke Hydraulic Set
The lower bore of the 194SAB(L)T 73 x 6.059 is not a sealing bore.
Product Family Nos. H40917 and H40918
NOTE: Contact your local Baker Oil Tools Representative for information regarding pressure and temperature ratings,
and elastomer availability.
65
MODEL SAB-4™ AND • Interlocked, expandable metal back-

up rings contact the casing and cre-
SAB(L)-4™ RETAINER ate a positive barrier to prevent pack-
PRODUCTION PACKER ing element extrusion at high
temperatures and pressures
Product Family Nos. H40921 • Setting requires no rotation or recipro-
and H40923 cation, thereby eliminating problems
of spacing out landing, etc. All o-rings
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION
which separate casing and annulus
The Baker Model SAB(L)-4 Retainer pressures, are supported by two
Production Packer is a development of back-up rings to improve long term
the highly successful SAB(L)-3 Packer. seal integrity
It is run and set in a single trip with the • SAB(L)-4 Packers are generally
completion tubing string. The Model designed to withstand pressure differ-
SAB(L)-4 incorporates maximum entials up to 7,500 psi
strength, uniformity of setting pressure • All alloy materials within the packer
and standardization of materials and are suitable for H2S service
design, specifically for the “Baker Stan- • Nitrile elements are supplied as stan-
dard Completion System” for the North dard on 4140 and 13% Cr Packers.
Sea (see page 19). Aflas elements can be supplied on
The Baker Standard Completion Sys- special order in restricted casing
tem is a group of products which form ranges
an integrated completion system, con- • The o-rings supplied as standard on
sisting of PBR, Anchor, Hydro-set Pack- S-type Packers are Viton
er and Millout Extension. These items • Body, guide and piston cover (compo-
form the core of the system, with cross- nents in flow paths) are furnished in
overs top and bottom connecting to the 4140 18-22 Rc or 13% Cr as standard
customers tubing. • SAB(L)-4 Packers come as standard
PERFORM Packer Performance Enve- with full tubing pressure test facility.
lopes are available for all size SAB(L)-4 This allows anchor packer and
Packers (see page 12). tailpipe completions to be tested as
one entire unit
FEATURES/BENEFITS • The upper seal bore of the packer is
• Solid, slim-lined construction and a compatible with the KC2-22 Anchor,
packing element system which resists the shear release anchor and the
swab-off. This permits a fast run-in Snap-In Snap-Out Set Down Acti-
without fear of impact damage or pre- vated Shear Release Anchor
mature setting, yet packs off securely
and permanently when the packer is
ACCESSORIES
set Retrievable PBR, Anchor, and Millout
• Two opposed sets of full circle, full Extension specifically designed for the
strength slips ensure that the packer “Baker Standard Completion for the
will stay where it is set North Sea” are available.
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer Packer Sealing Bore Upper
Seal Seal Min Bore
OD Weight OD
Size Bore Assembly Thru Seals
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm Size in. mm
6-5/8 168.3 17
85SABL 48 x 40 5.875 149.2 4.875 123.2 82FA48 3.938 100.0
7 177.8 26-32 !
32.3-58.4 # 194SAB 60 x 47 8.125 206.3 6.000 152.4 190DA60 4.875 123.8
9-5/8 244.4
47-58.4 " 194SABL 73 x 6.054 8.250 209.3 7.375 187.3 190SA73 6.054 152.4
194SAB 60 x 47 8.125 206.3 6.000 152.4 190DA60 4.875 123.8
9-7/8 250.1 62.8
194SABL 73 x 6.054 8.250 209.3 7.375 187.3 190SA73 6.054 152.4
Model SAB(L)-4 ! Aflas packing is only available for 7" (177.8 mm) 26-29 lb casing.
Retainer Production Packer # Aflas packing is only available for 9-5/8" (244.4 mm) 36-53.5 lb casing.
Product Family No. H40921 " Aflas packing is only available for 9-5/8" (244.4 mm) 47-53.5 lb casing.
66
TORQUEMASTER™ tion, adjustable in 3° increments.

Latching the anchor into the packer bore
PACKER, ANCHOR, AND isolates zone and prevents any move-
REMOVABLE ANCHOR ment of the whipstock.
The Baker TorqueMaster Packer and Re-
movable Whipstock Anchor System is a
and H41519 variation of the Baker TorqueMaster
Whipstock Permanent Packer System,
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION which allows multiple stab-in and stab-out
The TorqueMaster Packer is designed to of the whipstock anchor after the packer
permanently orient a TorqueMaster has been set.
Whipstock Anchor at a desired location in
This allows the lower zone to be pro-
a cased hole for sidetrack operations.
duced after removing the anchor or to
The packer is a variation of the familiar
space out for another lateral.
line of Baker Retainer Production Pack-
ers. FEATURES/BENEFITS
PERMANENT PACKER
The lower cone and torque slips are de- • Only one directional survey required
SYSTEMS
signed to withstand torque loads up to • Packer bore is open prior to landing
20,000 ft/lbs. Flat ramps shaped on the anchor allowing debris to fall through
lower cone provide a cam surface under • Anchor stinger does not extend below
the slips. Torque forces the slips outward, bottom of packer, allowing easy stab-in
engaging the casing bore. The slip tooth even if packer is set on top of cement
pattern encircles virtually all of the casing • No welded components
inside diameter, locking the packer in • Provides proven reliability of the stan-
place, holding torque and axial loads. dard line of Baker Retainer Production
The internal guide key of the packer is Packers
used to locate the whipstock anchor and • Packer provides isolation of zone
survey instruments. The guide key design below-no cement plug needed
is superior to other designs; no welding is • Piston inside of anchor allows easy
required to hold the key in place. The key stab-in even with closed fluid volume
is enclosed and can not be knocked out below packer
of place. • Oriented easily on location without
breaking any premium or API thread
The “TorqueMaster” Whipstock Anchor
connections
uses proven Baker Bonded Seals to seal
• Whipstock anchor is compatible with
the packer bore. After the packer is set
competitor whipstock systems
and a survey is made, the anchor is easily
• Multiple stab-in/stab-out of anchor
oriented on the surface to the desired di-
• Built-in debris excluder on anchor
rection. The anchor allows 360° full rota-
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer Whipstock Anchor
Size Max Seal Bore
Weight Packer Anchor
OD OD Thru Body
Size ! Size #
in. mm (lb/ft) in. mm in. mm
4-1/2 114.3 9.5-13.5 375-19 3.750 95.3
15.0-21.4 397-19 3.968 100.8
5 127 300-19
11.5
425-19 4.250 108.0 1.968 50.0
26.8
5-1/2 139.7 20-23 433-19 4.330 110.0
400-19
14-17 450-19 4.500 114.3
TorqueMaster
35-38 569-26 5.687 144.4
Whipstock Anchor
29-35 588-26 5.875 149.2
7 177.8 Product Family No.
23-26 600-26 6.000 152.4 H41518
17-20 500-26
625-26 6.250 158.8
39-42.8
7-5/8 193.6
24-33.7 650-26 6.500 165.1 2.688 68.3
7-3/4 196.9 46.1-48.6 625-26 6.250 158.8
9-5/8 244.4 36.6-53.5
813-26 8.125 206.4
9-7/8 250.1 62.8
800-26
10-3/4 273.0 40.5-60.7 944-26 9.437 239.7
13-3/8 339.7 54.5-72 1200-26 12.000 304.8 TorqueMaster
! Packer size example. Whipstock Packer
# Anchor size example. Product Family No.
813 designates 8.125" (206.4 mm) packer OD and -26 designates a 2.688" (68.3 mm) packer seal bore. H41519
800-26 denotes a “TorqueMaster” Anchor that is compatible with size 813-26 “TorqueMaster” Packers.
NOTE: -26 designates a seal assembly that will fit in a 2.688 in. seal bore diameter.
HYDRAULIC AND
HYDROSTATIC SETTING
MODULE AND ADAPTER
KIT FOR THE
TORQUEMASTER™
WHIPSTOCK PACKER
Product Family Nos. H41518,
H41581, and H41519
The Hydrostatic and Hydraulic Setting
Modules are designed to set the Torque-
Master Whipstock Packer, Product Fam-
ily No. H41518, or the Retrievable
TorqueMaster Packer, Product Family
No. H64501, at a desired location in a
cased hole for side track operations. The
TorqueMaster Packer, when set with the
Hydrostatic or Hydraulic Setting Module,
allows a true one-trip orient, set, and win-
dow cut when run with the WindowMas-
ter Window Cutting System. The
Hydrostatic Setting Module sets the
TorqueMaster Packer with applied pres-
sure to the annulus.
The Hydraulic Setting Module sets the
TorqueMaster Packer with applied pres-
sure to the tubing. A MWD Bypass Valve
and special WindowMaster Whipstock
and Starter Mill are required to set the
Hydraulic Setting Module.
TorqueMaster Packer FEATURES/BENEFITS

Washover Tool • True, one-trip orient, set, and mill
Product Family No.
H41519 • All the TorqueMaster benefits in
Hydraulic Setting Hydrostatic Setting Module for
one-trip
Module and Adapter Kit the TorqueMaster • Inexpensive and robust design
for the TorqueMaster Whipstock Packer • Rated to 20,000 ft/lbs torque in both
Whipstock Packer Product Family No. H41581
Product Family No. H41518 directions
• Shear ring field redressable (Hydro-
static Setting module only)
• Setting module and whipstock can be
SPECIFICATION GUIDE retrieved even if packer cannot. Leaves
minimal equipment in hole to wash
Casing
Size Hydraulic Hydrostatic over
Weight
in. mm
Adapter Kit Adapter Kit • Packer can be washed over and
6-5/8 168.2 24.00 retrieved in one-trip with Plug Plucker
* *
7 177.8 35.00-38.00 Type Retrieval Tool
7 177.8 29.00-32.00 * * • All seals can be tested
7 177.8 23.00-26.00 * * • Withstands up to 15,000 psi hydrostatic
17.00-20.00
7 177.8
39.00-42.80
* * pressure
7-5/8 193.6 24.00-33.70 * * • By design, the setting force is always
7-3/4 196.9 46.1-48.6 * * applied to the packer ensuring ele-
9-5/8 244.4 36.60-53.50 * * ments and slips remain energized
9-7/8 250.1 62.8 * * (Hydrostatic Setting module only)
10-3/4 273.0 40.50-60.70 *
13-3/8 339.7 54.50-72.00 *
68
RETRIEVABLE PACKER SYSTEMS Baker Oil Tools
RETRIEVABLE PACKER SELECTION CHART

Setting Method Used Holds Pressure From Primary Applications
n d/
n /
io n
n
Product
al
t io lo o
a t t io
er
io
Catalog Single Multiple Releasing
er
m
al
at
ss
Product Description Family
n
ul uc
Pu
la t
ic
io
jec er
n
m
Page String String Method
pw
e
e
im d
io
th
ul
No.
la t
ov
lin
In a t
pr
er
lti
St Pro
lo
ec
e
ns
a
Bo
Mu
Th
m
Ab
Iso
ire
De
Be
dr
El
Te
Co
Hy
W
Single String, Mechanical Set Packers
A-3 LOK-SET RET CSG PKR H64630 76 X X 6 X X X
AD-1 TENSION PKR H73908 70 X X 4 10 X X
ADL-1 LG BORE TENSION PKR H73912 70 X X 4 10 X X
AL-2 LG BORE LOK-SET RET CSG PKR H64628 76 X X 6 X X X
AR-1 SNAP-SET COMP PKR W/HOLD-DOWN H63631 80 X X 5 10 X X X
AR-1 SNAP-SET COMPRESSION PKR H63531 80 X X 5 10 10 X X
C-1 INVERTIBLE PKR H73930 72 X X X 5 11 11 X X
C-1 TANDEM TENSION PKR H60226 - X X 5 10 X X X
G COMPRESSION PKR H42003 72 X X 5 X 10 X
M RELIANT SERIES H64681 78 X X 6 X X X
MJS THERMAL PKR H41754 80 X 1 1 7 X X
MR-1 DOUBLE GRIP SNAP-SET PKR H63621 80 X X 5 X X X X
MR-1 SINGLE GRIP SNAP-SET PKR H63521 80 X X 5 X 10 X X
R-3 DOUBLE GRIP PKR H64201 74 X X 5 X X
R-3 SINGLE GRIP PKR H64101 74 X X 5 X 10 X
Single String, Hydraulic/Hydrostatic Set Packers
FH HYDROSTATIC PKR H78108 84 X X 7 X X
FHL LG BORE HYDROSTATIC PKR H78120 84 X X 7 X X
FHS SELECTIVE-SET HYDROSTATIC PKR H78110 84 X 2 7 X X
FHSL LG BORE SEL-SET HYDROSTATIC PKR H78125 84 X 2 7 X X
HS HYDRAULIC SET PKR H78460 82 X X 7 X X
HS-S HYDRAULIC SET PKR H78461 82 X 2 7 X X
PREMIER PKR H78463 109 X X 13 X X
Single String, Hydraulic Set, Sealbore Packers
HP-1AH PKR H48806 87 X X 9 X X
ISO-PAK PKR H78415 92 X X 9 X X
SC-2PAH PKR H646887 86 X X 9 X X
Single String, Setting Tool Set, Sealbore Packers
A RETRIEVA-D(A)(B) PKR H64675/79 88 X 3 9 X X
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
RETRIEVA-D(A)(B) PKR H64616/25 88 X 3 9 X X
SC-2P RETRIEVABLE SEAL BORE PKR H64686 90 X 3 9 X X
Single String, Wireline Set Packers
SYSTEMS
WL, RELIANT SERIES H64710/11 93 X X 6 X X
Dual String, Hydraulic/Hydrostatic Set Packers
A-5 HYDROSTATIC DUAL PKR H78316 95 X X 7 X X
AL-5 HYDROSTATIC DUAL PKR H78330 95 X X 7 X X
ALS-5 HYDROSTATIC DUAL PKR H78331 95 X 2 7 X X
D-ESP SUBMERSIBLE PUMP PKR H78560 102 X X 7 X X
GT DSR DUAL PKR H78509/10 104 X X 7 X X X
GT-S DSR SELECTIVE-SET DUAL PKR H78515 104 X 2 7 X X
J DBL GRIP SNAP-SET DUAL PKR H75701 98 X X 5 X X
J SGL GRIP SNAP-SET DUAL PKR H75601 98 X X 5 X 10 X
K DBL GRIP SNAP-SET DUAL PKR H75401 98 X X 5 X 10 X
K SGL GRIP SNAP-SET DUAL PKR H75501 98 X X 5 X X
TWIN SEAL SUBMERSIBLE PUMP PKR H78540 100 X X 7 X X
Tubing Hangers
MUDLINE TUBING HANGER H79101 106 X X 7 X
FLX™ PACK-OFF TUBING HANGER H79085 107 X X 7 X X
Whipstock Packers
TORQUEMASTER, RETRIEVABLE PKR H64501 108 X X 9 X X
NOTES:
(1) Set mechanically by torquing tubing string to right
(2) Set by hydraulically after actuating with slickline conveyed shifting tool
(3) Can also be set using by hydraulic setting tools run on a workstring
(4) Released by relieving applied tension required to rupture shear ring
(5) Released by relieving applied setting force
(6) Released with right-hand rotation
(7) Released with applied tension required to rupture shear ring
(8) Released with application of additional tension required to rupture shear ring or by right-hand rotation
(9) Released and removed from well with releasing tool run on tubing or workstring
(10) Holds limited differential pressure from this direction
(11) Ability to hold differential pressure is governed by Packer's orientation
(12) Released by lowering tubing string and rotating
(13) Released by severing mandrel

Rev., February, 2003
Baker Oil Tools RETRIEVABLE PACKER SYSTEMS
MODEL AD-1™ AND FEATURES/BENEFITS

ADL-1™ TENSION • Utilizes Baker’s rugged rocker-
type slips
PACKER • Bore through the packer mandrel
Product Family Nos. H73908 is larger than drift
and H73912 • Simple, low cost packer for fluid
injection
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION • Three release methods ensure
The AD-1 Tension Packer is a retrievability
compact, economical, retrievable • Uses proven one-piece packing
packer. Primarily used in waterflood element
applications, this packer can also ACCESSORIES
be used for production and/or
treating operations. It is used where Model C-1™ Tandem Tension™
a set-down packer is impractical. Packer, (Product Family No.
Since the AD-1 is tension set, it is H60226)
ideally suited for shallow wells Cup-Type Packer with Unloader,
where set-down weight is not (Product Family Nos. H60230 and
available. H67507)
The ADL-1 Tension Packer is a Unloader Subs, (Product Family
large-bore version of the Model No. H67510)
AD-1. The packer offers the same
features and benefits as the Model
AD-1 and running and retrieving op-
erations are the same.
Model AD-1 Tension Packer

70
MODEL AD-1 TENSION PACKER, PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H73908

SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Nom Max Gage
OD Weight !
Size ID Ring OD
4 101.6 9.5-11.6 41A 3.281 83.3
12.6-15.1 41B 3.609 91.7
4-1/2 114.3
9.5-13.5 43A 3.786 96.2
1.890 48.1
15-18 43B 4.140 105.2
5 127.0
11.5-15
43C 4.265 108.3
26
20-23 45A2 4.515 114.7
5-1/2 139.7
15.5 -20 45A4 4.656 118.3
13-15.5
5-3/4 146.1 22.5 45B 4.796 121.8
26 1.953 49.6
6 152.4 20-23 45C 5.077 129.0
15-18 45D 5.171 131.3
34 45E2 5.421 137.7
28-32 45E4 5.499 139.7
6-5/8 168.3
24 47A2 5.671 144.0
17-20 47A4 5.827 148.0
38 47A2 5.671 144.0
32-35 47A4 5.827 148.0
7 177.8 26-29 47B2 5.983 152.0
2.409 61.2
20-26 47B4 6.093 154.8
17-20 47C2 6.281 159.5
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
33.7-39 47C4 6.468 164.3
7-5/8 193.7 24-29.7 47D2 6.687 169.9
SYSTEMS
20-24 47D4 6.827 173.4
40-49 49A2 7.327 186.1
8-5/8 219.1 32-40 49A4 3.000 76.2 7.546 191.7
20-28 49B 7.796 198.0
47-53.5 51A2 8.218 208.7
9-5/8 244.5 40-47 51A4 8.437 214.3
29.3-36 51B 8.593 218.3
10-3/4 273.1 32.7-55.5 53A 4.000 101.6 9.515 241.7
11-3/4 298.5 38-60 53B 10.515 261.1
12-3/4 323.9 48-53 55A 11.625 295.3
13-3/8 339.7 48-72 55B 12.000 304.8
MODEL ADL-1 TENSION PACKER, PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H73912

SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Nom Gage Ring
OD Weight !
Size ID OD
5-1/2 139.7 13-17 45B x 2.90 4.750 120.7
23-26 45C x 2.90 2.903 73.7 5.000 127.0
6 152.4
18-20 45D x 2.90 5.218 132.5
23-29 47B x 4.12 5.983 152.0
7 177.8 4.125 104.8
17-20 47C2 x 4.12 6.281 159.5
8-5/8 219.1 24-32 49A4 x 4.00 4.000 101.6 7.615 193.4
! When selecting a packer for a casing weight common to two weight ranges (same OD), choose the packer
size shown for the lighter of the two weight ranges. Example: For 7" (177.8 mm) 20 lb/ft casing use packer
size 47C2. Under certain circumstances the other packer size may be run, such as when running in mixed
casing strings.
Repair kits, including items as packing elements, seal strings, etc., are available for redressing Baker
Retrievable Packers. Contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative. Use only Baker repair parts.
71
MODEL G™ MODEL C-1™ SINGLE

RETRIEVABLE GRIP INVERTIBLE
CASING PACKER PACKER
Product Family No. H42003 Product Family No. H73930
(Not Shown)
The Model G Packer is an econom-
ical compression set packer intend- The Model C-1 Packer can be run
ed for lower pressure production as a conventional set packer, or
applications. It is set by one-fourth when run upside down, it can be
turn right-hand rotation. Release is set in compression. Emergency re-
accomplished by straight pick up of leases are provided for both ten-
the tubing. If it is necessary to move sion and compression operations.
the packer further downhole after
the release, one-fourth turn left-
hand rotation will put the tool back
into the running position.
FEATURES/BENEFITS
• Rugged rocker-type slip system
• Compact length
• Full-opening bore through the
packer
• Low cost
• Safety joint for emergency discon-
nect
• Can be run upside down as ten-
sion packer (without emergency
release feature)
• Alternative packing element sys-
tems allows service above 250°F
(120°C)
Model G Retrievable Casing Packer


MODEL G RETRIEVABLE CASING PACKER, MODEL C-1 SINGLE-GRIP INVERTIBLE PACKER,

PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H42003 PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H73930
SPECIFICATION GUIDE SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer Casing Packer
Max Cone & Max Cone,
Nom
OD Weight ! Guide Ring Nom Guide or
Size ID OD Weight
OD Size ID Bottom Sub
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm OD
4-1/2 114.3 9.5-13.5 43A 3.786 96.2 in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm
15-18 43B 4.140 105.2 2-3/8 60.3 4.6-5.3 23 .625 15.9 1.813 46.1
5 127.0 1.895 48.1
11.5-15 6.4-6.5 28A 2.219 56.4
43C 4.265 108.3 2-7/8 73.0 1.000 25.4
26 4.7-5.6 28B 2.357 59.9
20-23 45A2 4.515 114.7 10.2 35A 2.764 70.2
5-1/2 139.7
15.5 -20 45A4 4.656 118.3 3-1/2 88.9 7.7-9.3 35B 2.812 71.4
1.531 38.9
13-15.5 5.75 35C
3.029 76.9
5-3/4 146.1 22.5 45B 4.796 121.8 15.70 ! 35D
4 101.6
26 1.973 50.1 9.5-11.6 41A 3.281 83.3
1.978 50.2
6 152.4 20-23 45C 5.077 129.0 4-1/2 114.3 12.6-15.1# 41B 3.609 91.7
15-18 45D 5.171 131.3 ! Plain End: 14.69 lb
34 45E2 5.421 137.7 # Plain End: 12.24 - 14.98 lb
28-32 45E4 5.499 139.7 Repair kits, including such items as packing elements, seal rings, etc., are
6-5/8 168.3 24-28 46A4 5.603 142.3 available for redressing Baker Retrievable Packers. Contact your Baker
Oil Tools Representative. Use only genuine Baker repair parts.
24 47A2 5.671 144.0
17-20 47A4 5.827 148.0
46A4 2.416 61.4 5.603 142.3
38
47A2 5.671 144.0
32-35 47A4 5.827 148.0
47B2
7 177.8 26-29 5.983 152.0
47B2 x 3.00 3.000 76.2
47B4 2.416 61.4
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
20-26 6.093 154.8
47BA x 3.00 3.000 76.2
17-20 47C2 6.281 159.5
SYSTEMS
33.7-39 47C4 6.468 164.3
2.416 61.4
7-5/8 193.7 24-29.7 47D2 6.687 169.9
20-24 47D4 6.827 173.4
40-49 49A2 7.327 186.1
8-5/8 219.1 32-40 49A4 3.000 76.2 7.546 191.7
20-28 49B 7.796 198.0
47-53.5 51A2 8.233 209.1
9-5/8 244.5 40-47 51A4 8.452 214.7
4.000 101.6
29.3-36 51B 8.608 218.6
10-3/4 273.1 32.75-55.5 53A 9.515 241.7
11-3/4 298.5 38-60 53B 10.515 267.7
12-3/4 323.9 43-53 55A 4.000 101.6 11.640 295.7
13-3/8 339.7 48-72 55B 12.015 305.2
! When selecting a packer for a casing weight common to two weight
ranges (same OD), choose the packer size shown for the lighter of the
two weight ranges. Example: For 5-1/2" (139.7 mm) OD 20 lb/ft casing
use packer size 45A4. Under certain circumstances the other packer
size may be run, such as when running-in mixed casing strings.
Repair kits, including such items as packing elements, seal rings, etc., are
available for redressing Baker Retrievable Packers. Contact your Baker
Oil Tools Representative. Use only genuine Baker repair parts.
73
MODEL R-3™ RETRIEVABLE

CASING PACKER
DOUBLE GRIP
SINGLE GRIP (Not Shown)
The Model R-3 Packer is a versatile pro- Bypass Valve Seal
duction packer intended for a broad

range of production applications. It is a Mandrel
compression set type packer suitable for
stimulation and treating applications in Bypass Valve Seat
the double grip configuration. In applica- Differential
tions where excessive bottom hole pres- Lock (unlocked)
sures have been depleted, a single grip

version can be used as an economical Spring
production packer. It is set with one-
fourth turn right-hand rotation and can be
released with straight pick up.
Button-Type
FEATURES/BENEFITS Hold-down
• Rugged rocker-type slip system
• Hydraulic button-type hold-down
located below bypass valve
• Unique, built-in, “differential lock”
assists in keeping bypass closed 3-Element
Packing System
• Effective bypass design allows rapid
pressure equalization and resists
swab-off
• Field proven, three piece packing
element system
Cone
Rocker-Type
Slips
Control-Pin
Actuated
Automatic
Bottom
Running In Producing
Model R-3 Double -Grip
Retrievable Casing Packer
Model R-3 Double-Grip
Packer Operation
74
MODEL R-3 DOUBLE-GRIP AND SINGLE-GRIP RETRIEVABLE CASING PACKERS,
Rev., April, 2003
Rev., September, 2002
RETRIEVABLE PACKER SYSTEMS

SPECIFICATION GUIDE

Nom Max Gage & Nom Max Gage &
OD Weight ! OD Weight !
Size # ID Guide Ring OD Size # ID Guide Ring OD
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm
28A 2.234 56.7 46A4 5.603 142.3
6.4-6.5 38
2-7/8 73.0 28A Hi-Temp" .750 19.1 2.330 51.2 47A2 5.671 144.0
2.406 61.0
4.7-5.6 28B 2.357 59.9 46B 5.796 147.2
10.2 35A 2.782 70.7 32-35 47A4
5.827 148.0
3-1/2 88.9 7.7-9.2 35B 1.375 34.9 2.844 72.2 47A4 x 3.00 3.000 76.2
5.75 35C 3.038 77.2 7 177.8 47B2 2.406& 61.0
26-29 5.939 150.9
4 101.6 9.5-11.6 41A 3.303 83.9 47B2 x 3.00 3.000 76.2
1.500 38.1 47B4 2.406& 61.0
15.1 41B 3.620 92.0 20-26 6.093 154.8
4-1/2 114.3 47B4 x 3.00 3.000 76.2
9.5-13.5 43A 3.786 96.2
15-18 43B 4.140 105.2 47C2 2.406& 61.0
5 127.0 1.850 48.0 17-20 6.281 159.5
11.5-15 47C2 x 3.00 3.000 76.2
43C 4.265 108.3 47C4 2.406& 61.0
26 33.7-39 6.468 164.3
45A2 1.930 49.9 47C4 x 3.00 3.000 76.2
20-23 4.515 114.7 7-5/8 193.7 24-29.7 47D2 6.687 169.9
45A2 x 2-3/8 2.365 60.3 2.406& 61.0
5-1/2 139.7 15.5 -20 45A4 1.930 49.9 47D4
4.656 118.3 20-24 6.827 173.4
17-20 45A4 x 2-3/8 2.365 60.3 47D4 x 3.00 3.000 76.2
45B 1.930 49.9 44-49 49A2 7.327 186.1
13-15.5 8-5/8 219.1 32-40 49A4 3.476 88.3 7.546 191.7
45B x 2-3/8 2.365 60.3
45B 1.930 49.9 20-28 49B2 7.796 198.0
5-3/4 146.1 22.5 4.796 121.8 47-53.5 51A2 8.233 209.1
45B x 2-3/8 2.365 60.3
45B 1.930 49.9 9-5/8 244.5 40-47 51A4 3.958 100.5 8.453 209.1
26 29.3-36 51B2 8.608 218.6
45B x 2-3/8 2.365 60.3
6 152.4 ! When selecting a packer for a casing weight common to two weight ranges (same OD), choose
20-23 45C 5.078 129.0
the packer size shown for the lighter of the two weight ranges. Example: For 7" (177.8 mm) OD
15-18 45D 5.171 131.3
1.930 49.9 20 lb/ft casing use packer size 47C2. Under certain circumstances the other packer size may be
34 45E2 5.421 137.7 run, such as when running in mixed casing strings.
45E4 5.499 139.7 # Sizes 28, 32, 41 are available in this model as Single Grip Packers, Product Family No. H64101.
28-32
46A2 2.406& 61.0 5.490 139.5 For double-grip version, contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative about the Model RC
45EF 1.963 49.9 5.499 139.7 Hydro-Grip Cementer, Product Family No. H40720.
24-28 " For use when anticipated conditions exceed 200°F (93.33°C) or 3,800 psi (26.18 MPa)
6-5/8 168.3 46A4 5.603 142.3
differential across tool.
Baker Oil Tools

24 47A2 2.406& 61.0 5.671 144.0
& 2.347" (60.0 mm) x 42" (1,067 mm) drift bar
17-20 47A4
5.827 148.0 Repair kits, including such items as packing elements, seal rings, etc., are available for redressing
20 47A4 x 3.00
3.000 76.2 Baker Retrievable Packers. Contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative. Use only genuine Baker
17 47B2 x 3.00 5.983 152.0 repair parts.
75
SYSTEMS
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
MODEL A-3™ AND trolling tubing forces related to

change fluid temperatures
AL-2™ LOK-SET • Opposed, non-transferring, dove-
RETRIEVABLE CASING tail slips prevent packer move-
PACKER ment associated by changing
differential pressures, while
allowing the landing of the tubing
and H64628
in tension, neutral, or compres-
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION sion
• Rotational release provides ease
The Model A-3 Lok-Set Packer of operation in combination with
combines advantages of a retriev- the L-10 On-Off Tubing Connec-
able packer with features of a per- tor
manent packer. Its ability to lock • Packing element compression is
down tubing forces provides for a locked in by ratcheting action of
broad range of applications, includ- lock segments, also permitting
ing production, injection, zone isola- rotation in only one direction
tion, and remedial operations. The
packer is set with right-hand rota- ACCESSORIES
tion while slacking off tubing weight.
To provide a simple and reliable in-
Right-hand rotation with slight ten-
jection system for retrieving the in-
sion applied releases the packer.
jection string without having to
The Model AL-2 Lok-Set Packer is unseat the packer:
similar to the Model A-3 and is
• Model L-10 or L-316 On-Off Seal-
recommended when a larger-than-
ing Connectors, Product Family
normal bore size is required.
Nos. H68420 and H68422.
FEATURES/BENEFITS • Baker Blanking Plug can be used
• Holds pressure from above and in the seating nipple profile of the
below, without relying on set- on-off sealing connector to pro-
down weight, tubing tension, or vide a means of plugging the
hydraulic hold-down lower zone while the tubing is
• Provides tubing anchoring with being pulled.
tension applied, suitable for
pumping wells or injection, con-
Model A-3 Lok-Set

Retrievable Casing Packer
76
A-3 LOK-SET RETRIEVABLE CASING PACKER AL-2 LARGE BORE LOK-SET RETRIEVABLE CASING PACKER
Nom Max Gage Max Diameter
OD Weight ! Nom Max Gage
Size ID Ring OD OD Weight ! of Compressed
Size ID Ring OD
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm Drag Block
4 101.6 9.5-12.9 in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm in. mm
41A2 3.244 82.4
4-1/2 144.3 21.6-23.6 20 45A2 x 2-3/8 4.562 115.9 4.592 116.6
4 101.6 9.5 1.500 38.1 5-1/2 139.7 15.5 -17 45A4 x 2-3/8 4.656 118.3 4.750 120.7
41A4 3.423 112.4 2.375 60.3
18.8 13
45B x 2-3/8 4.796 121.8 4.902 124.5
13.5-17.7 41B 3.578 90.9 6 152.4 26
4-1/2 114.3
11.6-13.5 43A2 26-29 47B2 x 3.00 5.983 152.0
3.786 96.2
9.5-10.5 43A4 7 177.8 23-26 47B4 x 3.00 6.093 154.8 5.990 152.2
15-18 43B 4.140 105.2 17-20 47C2 x 3.00 6.281 159.5
5 127.0 3.00 76.2
11.5-15 33.7 47C4 x 3.00 6.468 164.3
43C 4.265 108.3
26 7-5/8 194.7 24-29.7 47D2 x 3.00 6.687 169.9 6.552 166.4
20-23 45A2 4.515 114.7 20-24 47D4 x 3.00 6.827 173.4
5-1/2 139.7 ! When selecting a packer for a casing weight common to two weight ranges (same OD), choose the
15.5 -20 45A4 1.978 50.2 4.656 118.3
packer size shown for the lighter of the two weight ranges. Example: For 7" (177.8 mm) 26 lb/ft casing
13-15.5 use packer size 47B4. Under certain circumstances the other packer size may be run, such as when
45B 4.796 121.8
26 running in mixed casing strings.
6 152.4 20-23 45C 5.078 129.0 Repair kits, including such items as packing elements, seal rings, etc., are available for redressing Baker
Retrievable Packers. Contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative. Use only genuine Baker repair parts.
15-18 45D 5.171 131.3
34 45E 5.421 137.7
24-32 45F 5.499 139.7
6-5/8 168.3 24 47A2 2.441 62.0 5.671 144.0
17-24 45G 1.978 50.2 5.796 147.2
17-20 47A4 5.827 148.0
38 47A2 5.671 144.0
32-35 47A4 5.827 148.0
7 177.8 26-29 47B2 5.983 152.0
23-26 47B4 2.441 62.0 6.093 154.8
17-20 47C2 6.281 159.5
33.7-39 47C4 6.468 164.3
Baker Oil Tools

7-5/8 193.7 24-29.7 47D2 6.687 169.9
20-24 47D4 6.827 173.4
44-49 49A2 7.327 186.1
8-5/8 219.1 32-40 49A4 7.546 191.7
20-28 49B 7.796 198.0
3.500 88.9
47-53.5 51A2 8.234 209.1
9-5/8 244.5 40-47 51A4 8.452 214.7
29.3-36 51B 8.608 218.6
77
SYSTEMS
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
RELIANT SERIES FEATURES/BENEFITS

MODEL M MECHANICAL • Ease of setting and release, one-
fourth turn right-hand rotation to
SET SINGLE STRING set, one-fourth turn right-hand
Click Here for
RETRIEVABLE PACKER rotation to release
Additional
Information
• Superior sealing system with
three element stack
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION • No O-rings required
• Molded internal bypass seal
The Model M Packer is a mechani-
• Rated to 10,000 psi @ 350°F
cal set retrievable high performance
• Fully tested in minimum to maxi-
production packer. It is designed to
mum API tolerances for each
meet the demands of high pressure
specified casing weight
frac procedures, as well as produc-
• Temperature tested with multiple
tion applications. The packer is set
pressure reversals
in compression, allowing final posi-
• Tension loads compatible with
tioning in compression, tension, or
tubing string @ 10,000 psi
neutral.
• Staged upper slip release with
solid upper cone
• Full tubing ID packer bore
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Weight
OD Packer Min ID Max ID
Range
Size
in. mm (lb/ft) in. mm in. mm
15.1 365-188 3.752 95.3 3.904 99.2
4-1/2" 114.3 11.6-13.5! 375-188 3.853 97.9 4.069 104.0
9.5-10.5 388-188 3.996 101.5 4.154 105.5
21.4-23.2! 388-188 3.943 100.2 4.220 107.28
5" 127.0
15-18 410-188 4.195 106.6 4.486 113.9
20-23 450-237 4.578 116.3 4.868 126.4
5-1/2" 139.7 17-20 460-237 4.696 119.3 4.976 126.4
15.5-17 472-237 4.819 122.4 5.031 127.8
29-32 591-237 5.990 152.1 6.293 159.8
26-29 600-237 6.174 156.8 6.381 162.1
7" 177.8
23-26 608-237 6.266 159.2 6.466 164.2
20-23 618-237 6.239 158.5 6.570 166.9
! If exceeding 8,500 psi (586 bar) and 300°F (149°C) in 4-1/2" (114.3 mm) 11.6# or 5"
(127.0 mm) 21.4#, use larger Gage Ring.
Reliant Series Model M Mechanical


MODEL MJS™ • Integral expansion joint with man-

drel lengths of 15' and 20' pro-
THERMAL PACKER vides for tubing expansion;
Product Family No. H41754 eliminates the need for additional
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION equipment to be run above the
packer. Insulated mandrels and
The MJS Packer is a compact, high mandrels of other lengths are
performance thermal packer sys- available upon special request
tem which offers both an expansion • Packer is easily set using right-
joint and a casing packer in one as- hand rotation in deep or shallow
sembly. The MJS is a rotationally wells
set double-grip packer specifically • Packer is released with tension
designed for use in steam injection, and offers a “soft shear” feature
huff and puff or geothermal produc- which reduces tubing stretch and
tion wells where differential pres- re-coil during shear-out, making it
sures from above or below are ideal for use with insulated tubing
anticipated. or the longer strings of deep injec-
tions wells. Shear release force is
FEATURES / BENEFITS
adjustable
• Rated for 2,800 psi (19.2 MPa)
differential pressure at 680°F NOTE: Tubing weight and grade
(360°C) must be capable of applying mini-
• Double-grip design makes this mum specified setting torque to the
packer ideal for use in applica- packer.
tions where pressure testing of
the annulus is required
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
SYSTEMS
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Nominal ID
Max Gage
Packer Non-Insulated Insulated Stroke
OD Weight Ring OD
Size Mandrel Mandrel
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm in. mm ft m
13.5 - 15.1 43A 1.50 38.1 3.687 93.7
4-1/2 114.3
9.5 - 11.6 43A4 1.50 38.1 3.781 96.1
15 - 18 43B2 2.0 50.8 4.125 104.8
5 127.0 - -
11.5 - 13 43B4 2.0 50.8 4.250 108.0
20 45A2 1.94 49.2 4.594 116.7
5-1/2 139.7
13 - 17 45A4 1.94 49.2 4.687 119.1
28 - 32 46A2 2.50 50.8 1.995 50.7 5.465 138.9 15 4.6
6-5/8 168.2
20 - 24 46A4 2.50 50.8 5.718 145.3
29 - 32 47A2 3.00 76.2 5.875 149.3
2.441 62.0
7 177.8 23 - 26 47B4 3.00 76.2 6.062 154.0 and and
17 - 20 47C2 3.00 76.2 6.250 159.8
33.7 - 39 47C4 3.50 88.9 6.406 162.8
7-5/8 193.6 26.4 - 29.7 47D2 3.50 88.9 - - 6.656 169.1 20 6.1
20 - 24 47D4 3.50 88.9 6.812 173.1
44 - 49 49A2 4.50 114.3 7.343 186.6
8-5/8 219.0 36 - 40 49A4 4.50 114.3 7.515 190.9
3.068 78.0
24 - 32 49B 4.50 114.3 7.750 196.9
43.5 - 47 51A2 4.875 123.9 8.438 214.4
9-5/8 244.4
36 - 40 51A4 4.875 123.9 3.068 78.0 8.593 218.3
Model MJS Thermal Packer

79
MODEL MR-1™ SINGLE- FEATURES/BENEFITS

GRIP AND DOUBLE-GRIP • Multiple packing element system
proven on the Model R-3
SNAP-SET™ PACKER • Operation of the packer is simple.
Product Family Nos. H63521 No tubing rotation is required
and H63621 • A Collet-Type Snap-Latch pre-
vents the packer from setting
before landing the seal assembly
MODEL AR-1™ SNAP- or before setting a lower retriev-
SET COMPRESSION able packer. Lower portion of the
PACKER WITH AND tool is rotationally locked to
deliver torque in either direction
WITHOUT HOLD-DOWN through the packer
Product Family Nos. H63631 • The Model MR-1 Double-Grip
and H63531 Snap-Set Packer will support
high differentials from either
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION direction while supporting the
The Snap-Set Packers, Model load in the annulus. The Model
MR-1 and AR-1, are used above MR-1 Single-Grip Snap-Set
Baker Seal Bore Packers in single Packer does not have the hold-
string, two packer installations. The down and should be used when
MR-1 Double-Grip version has both high differentials are not
slips and hydraulic hold-downs expected from below
while the single-grip model has
slips only.
The Snap-Set Compression
Packer, Model AR-1, is used where
no severe differentials from above
are expected. It is recommended as
a lower cost alternative in these
applications.
Model MR-1 Single-Grip Snap-Set Packer

80
SINGLE STRING SNAP-SET PACKERS

SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Nom Max Gage & Guide
OD Weight !
Size ID Ring OD
4-1/2 144.3 9.5-13.5 43A 3.786 96.2
15-18 43B 4.140 105.2
5 127.0
11.5-15
43C 4.265 108.3
26
20-23 45A2 4.515 114.7
5-1/2 139.7
15.5 -20 45A4 4.656 118.3
13-15.5 1.969 50.0
5-3/4 146.1 22.5 45B 4.796 121.8
26
6 152.4 20-23 45C 5.078 129.0
15-18 45D 5.171 131.3
34 45E2 5.421 137.7
28-32 45E4 5.499 139.7
6-5/8 168.3
24 47A2 5.671 144.0
17-20 47A4 5.827 148.0
38 47A2 5.671 144.0
32-35 47A4 5.827 148.0
7 177.8 26-29 47B2 5.983 152.0
2.416 61.4
20-26 47B4 6.093 154.8
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
17-20 47C2 6.281 159.5
33.7-39 47C4 6.468 164.3
SYSTEMS
7-5/8 193.7 24-29.7 47D2 6.687 169.9
20-24 47D4 6.827 173.4
! When selecting a packer for a casing weight common to two weight ranges (same OD), choose the packer size shown for the lighter
of the two weight ranges. Example: For 7" (177.8 mm) 26 lb/ft casing use packer size 47B4. Under certain circumstances the other
packer size may be run, such as when running in mixed casing strings.
Repair kits, including such items as packing elements, seal rings, etc., are available for redressing Baker Retrievable Packers. Contact
your Baker Oil Tools Representative. Use only genuine Baker repair parts.
81
MODEL HS™ AND • Applications where it is desirable

to test the tubing string before
HS-S™ HYDRAULIC packer setting or to indepen-
SET SINGLE STRING dently set and test individual
RETRIEVABLE PACKER packers in multiple packer com-
pletions (HS-S)
• Stacked packer applications
and H78461
FEATURES/BENEFITS
DESCRIPTION
• Operationally simple
The Model HS is the new standard • Hydraulically set
for high performance single string • Shear release
retrievable hydraulic set, shear re- • Built-in unloader and bypass - to
lease packers. The HS offers fea- aid in releasing and retrieving
tures that provide maximum pre-set • Hydraulic interlock system pre-
prevention while running, improved vents preset
sealing and retrieving reliability, and • Patented element system - incor-
metallurgy and elastomer selec- porates a “zero gap” back-up sys-
tions fit for the well environment. tem
The simple and reliable design is • All o-rings tested during assem-
compliant. bly of the packer
• Bi-directional slip
The Model HS-S is the selective set
• Short, compact design
version of the HS Hydraulic Set Sin-
• No mandrel movement during
gle String Packer. Setting and re-
setting allows stacked packer
trieval is essentially the same as the
applications
HS with the exception of an inner
• PERFORM Packer Performance
sleeve that must be shifted before
Envelopes available for all size
the packer will set. The selective
HS and HS-S Packers (see page
setting mechanism prevents the
12).
packer from premature setting
when high tubing to annulus pres- ACCESSORIES
sure differentials are encountered
A tubing plugging device must be
or when tubing pressure tests are
positioned below the packer for ac-
performed.
tuation:
APPLICATIONS • Model E Hydro-Trip Sub,
• Production, injection and zonal (Product Family No. H79928)
isolation • Model C Differential Displacing
• Single string selective comple- Valve, (Product Family No.
tions or dual string completions H75912)
with multiple packers • Model CMU(D) Sliding Sleeve,
• Completions where maximum (Product Family Nos. H81079
pre-set prevention while running and H81080) with Blanking Plug
is desired
• Baker Flow Control Seating Nip-
• Deviated wells or other applica-
ple with Blanking Plug
tions where no rotation for instal-
lation or removal is desired • Other Hydraulic Setting Devices,
• Applications where displacing and (Product Family Nos. H46921,
setting the packers after the well H79928, and H75917)
is flanged up is desirable
Model HS Hydraulic Set

Single String Retrievable Packer
82
MODEL HS HYDRAULIC SET PACKER, PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H78460

SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Weight Min Gage
OD Packer
Range ID OD
Size
450-193 1.930 49.0
5-1/2 139.7 15.5-23 4.500 114.3
450-237 2.373 60.3
608-292 2.920 74.2
23-26 608-237 2.373 60.3 6.080 154.4
608-193 1.930 49.0
7 177.8
591-292 2.920 74.2
23-32! 591-237 2.373 60.3 5.910 150.1
591-193 1.930 49.0
831-193 1.930 49.0
831-237 2.373 60.3
9-5/8 244.5 40-53.5 8.310 211.1
831-292 2.920 74.2
831-389 3.894 98.9
! 591size fully rated in 26-32 lb/ft casing, but can be expanded to cover 23 lb/ft when downward
tubing forces are zero or negative (i.e., tension).
See packer rating envelopes.
MODEL HS-S HYDRAULIC SET PACKER, PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H78461

SPECIFICATION GUIDE
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
Casing Packer
SYSTEMS
Weight Min Gage
OD Packer
Range ID OD
Size
608-281 2.813 71.4
23-26 6.080 154.4
608-231 2.313 58.8
7 177.8
23-32 ! 591-281 2.813 71.5
5.910 150.1
591-231 2.313 58.8
! 591 size fully rated in 26-32 lb/ft casing, but can be expanded to cover 23 lb/ft when downward
tubing forces are zero or negative (i.e., tension).
See packer rating envelopes.
83
MODEL FH™ AND FHL™ • Applications where displacing

and setting after the well is
HYDROSTATIC SET flanged up is desirable
SINGLE STRING • Test the tubing string before
RETRIEVABLE PACKER packer setting or to indepen-
dently set and test individual
packers in multiple packer com-
and H78120
pletions (FHS, FHSL)
The Model FH is the industry stan-
dard, hydrostatic set and shear re- FEATURES/BENEFITS
lease single string retrievable • Operationally simple
packer. The FH Packer is hydrauli- • Hydraulically activated, hydro-
cally activated by applying tubing static set - low pressure, rig pump
pressure against a plugging device capable activation
below the packer. The packer re- • Field adjustable shear release
quires only straight pull to release. • Built-in unloader and bypass - to
aid in releasing and retrieving.
The Model FHL is the large bore • Packoff is mechanically locked
version of the FH Packer. Features, and constantly reinforced by
advantages, and operational proce- hydrostatic pressure
dures are the same as those for the • Triple seal multi-durometer ele-
FH Packers. ments - insure pressure integrity
over a wide range of tempera-
MODEL FHS™ AND tures and conforms easily to cas-
ing irregularities
FHSL™ HYDROSTATIC • No mandrel movement during
SET SINGLE STRING setting allows stacked packer
RETRIEVABLE PACKER applications
Product Family Nos. H78110 ACCESSORIES

and H78125 A tubing plugging device must be
The Model FHS and the FHSL are positioned below the packer for ac-
the selective set version of the FH tuation:
and FHL Packers. Setting and re- • Model E Hydro-Trip Sub,
trieval is essentially the same as the (Product Family No. H79928)
FH with the exception of an inner • Model C Differential Displacing
sleeve that must be shifted before Valve, (Product Family No.
the packer will set. The selective H75912)
setting mechanism prevents the • Model CMU(D) Sliding Sleeve,
packer from premature setting (Product Family Nos. H81079
when high tubing to annulus pres- and H81080) with Blanking Plug
sure differentials are encountered
• Baker Flow Control Seating Nip-
or when tubing pressure tests are
ple with Blanking Plug
performed.
• Other Hydraulic Setting Devices,
APPLICATIONS (Product Family Nos. H46921,
• Production, injection and zonal H79928, and H75917)
isolation
• Single string selective comple-
tions or dual string completions
with multiple packers
• Deviated wells or other applica-
Model FH Hydrostatic Set Single tions where no rotation for instal-
String Retrievable Packer
lation or removal is desired

MODEL FH HYDROSTATIC SINGLE STRING PACKER, MODEL FHL HYDROSTATIC SINGLE STRING PACKER,
Max Gage Nom Max Gage Ring
Nom OD Weight!
OD Weight! Ring Size ID OD
Size ID
OD in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm 24 47A2 5.671 144.0
4-1/2 114.3 9.5-13.5 43A 3.786 95.2 6-5/8 168.3 20 47A4 5.827 148.0
15-18 43B 4.140 105.2 17 47B2 5.983 152.0
5 127.0
11.5-15 38 47A2 5.671 144.0
43C 4.255 108.3
26 32-35 47A4 5.827 148.0
20-23 45A2 4.515 114.7 7 177.8 26-29 47B2 3.000 76.2 5.983 152.0
5-1/2 139.7
15.5 -20 45A4 4.656 118.3 20-26 47B4 6.093 154.8
1.978 50.2
13-15.5 17-20 47C2 6.281 159.5
45B 4.796 121.8
26 33.7-39 47C4 6.468 164.3
6 152.4 20-23 45C 5.078 129.0 7-5/8 193.7 24-29.7 47D2 6.687 169.9
15-18 45D 5.171 131.3 20-24 47D4 6.827 173.4
34 45E2 5.421 137.7 51A2 x 4-3/4 4.750 120.7
6-5/8 168.3 28-32 45E4 5.499 139.7 47-53.5 8.233 209.1
51A2
24-28 9-5/8 244.5
46A4 2.416 61.4 5.603 142.3 40-47 51A4 4.000 101.6 8.452 214.7
7 177.8 38 29.3-36 51B 8.608 218.6
24 47A2 5.671 144.0 ! When selecting a packer for a casing weight common to two weight ranges (same OD), choose the
6-5/8 168.3 packer size shown for the lighter of the two weight ranges. Example: For 7" (177.8 mm)
17-20 47A4 5.827 148.0
20 lb/ft casing use packer size 47C2. Under certain circumstances the other packer size may be run,
38 47A2 5.671 144.0 such as when running in mixed casing strings.
2.416 61.4
32-35 47A4 5.827 148.0 Repair kits, including such items as packing elements, seal rings, etc., are available for redressing Baker
7 177.8 26-29 47B2 5.983 152.0 Retrievable Packers. Contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative. Use only genuine Baker repair parts.
20-26 47B4 or or 6.093 154.8
17-20 47C2 6.281 159.5
33.7-39 47C4 6.468 164.3
2.000 50.8
7-5/8 193.7 24-29.7 47D2 6.687 169.9
20-24 47D4 6.827 173.4
44-49 49A2 3.000 46.2 7.327 186.1
8-5/8 219.1 32-40 49A4 7.546 191.7
or or
Baker Oil Tools

20-28 49B 7.796 198.0
47-53.5 51A2 2.416 61.4 8.233 209.1
9-5/8 244.5 40-47 51A4 or or 8.452 214.7
29.3-36 51B 2.000 50.8 8.608 218.6
! When selecting a packer for a casing weight common to two weight ranges (same OD), choose the
packer size shown for the lighter of the two weight ranges. Example: For 7" (177.8 mm)
20 lb/ft casing use packer size 47C2. Under certain circumstances the other packer size may be run,
such as when running in mixed casing strings.
Repair kits, including such items as packing elements, seal rings, etc., are available for redressing Baker
85
Retrievable Packers. Contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative. Use only genuine Baker repair parts.
SYSTEMS
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
MODEL SC-2PAH™ • Packing element system available

with alternate elastomers
PACKER • Bi-directional, case hardened
Product Family No. H64687 slips, are suitable for all grades of
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION casing
• Slips are protected by the slip
The Model SC-2PAH Packer is a cage during run in
hydraulic set, fully retrievable, high • One-trip installation
performance version of our field • No tubing manipulation required
proven SC-2P Retainer Production • The setting mechanism is actu-
Packer. The SC-2PAH is offered for ated hydraulically with pump pres-
use in high pressure and/or high sure at any depth allowing the
temperature wells where premium tubing to be displaced and the
retrievable retainer production packer to be set after the well is
packers are required. flanged up
The Model SC-2PAH Packer has • Accepts standard permanent
an enlarged seal bore at the upper packer accessories
end making it possible to have a • Easily retrieved using Baker
larger bore through the packer. The Model S-1 Retrieving Tool
packer is fully compatible with • Packer’s releasing mechanism is
standard Baker sealing not affected by differential pres-
accessories, including retrievable sure or tailpipe weight
and/or expendable plugs.
FEATURES/BENEFITS
• Single, self-energizing “cup-form-
ing” packing element system for
repeated temperature and pres-
sure reversals
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer Seal Nipple
Min Bore Dia Seal Min Bore
Max
OD Weight Thru Packer Bore for Thru Seal
Size OD Size
Body Seal Nipple Nipple
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
32.0-35.0 70A-40x32 5.812 147.8 3.250 82.5 4.000 101.6 80DA-40 3.250 82.5
7 177.8 29.0-35.0 70A4-47x38! 5.820 147.8 4.750 120.6 81FA-47 3.875 98.4
3.875 98.4 or or or
23.0-26.0 70B-47x38 6.000 152.4 4.750 120.6 82FA-47 4.000 101.6
7-5/8 193.6 29.7 76B2-47x38 6.690 169.9 81FA-47
3.875 98.4
96A2-47x38 4.750 120.6 3.875 98.4
192-47
96A2-47x40
9-5/8 244.4 47.0-53.5 8.319 211.3 4.000 101.6
96A2-48x40 4.875 123.8 80DA48 4.145 105.2
96A2-60x47 4.750 121.6 6.000 152.4 190-60 4.875 123.8
! A drift check of 5.879" x 42" is recommended before setting the packer in 7" (177.8 mm), 35 lb/ft casing
and the normal running speed should be reduced to ensure that the packing element is not affected by
swabbing.
Model SC-2PAH Packer

86
MODEL HP-1AH™ • No tubing manipulation

• Packoff is mechanically locked in
PACKER • Compatible with standard seal
Product Family No. H48806 assemblies and packer accesso-
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION ries
• Available with a variety of elasto-
The Baker Model HP-1AH Packer is meric and metallic materials to
a fully retrievable high performance insure compatibility with all down-
version of the SC-2PAH Packer. hole environments for maximum
The HP-1AH is a dual bore, one-trip reliability and longest life
hydraulic set packer, with its prima- • Specifically designed for compati-
ry application in one-trip perforate bility with tubing conveyed perfo-
and completion systems. rating (TCP) guns
• Ideally suited for high pressure/
FEATURES/BENEFITS
high temperature DST or long
• Gun explosives spend minimum
term production applications
time at high bottom hole tempera-
ture
• Hydraulically set with pump pres-
sure, the tubing can be displaced
and the packer set after the well is
flanged up
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
T&C Max Nom Seal Bore Diameter
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
OD Packer
Weight ! OD Upper Lower
Size
SYSTEMS
5-1/2 139.7 20-23 55-32x23 4.510 114.5 3.250 82.5 2.390 60.7
6-5/8 168.2 24
66B-36x26 5.730 145.5 3.625 92.0 2.688 68.2
38
32-35 70A-40x32 5.812 147.6
7 177.8 29-32 70AB-40x32 5.910 150.1
26-29 70B2-40x32 5.968 151.5
4.000 101.6 3.250 82.5
20-23
70B6-40x32 6.187 157.1
45
7-5/8 196.6
39 76-40x32 6.453 163.9
! When selecting a HP-1AH packer for a casing weight common to two weight ranges (same OD), choose
the packer size shown for the heavier of the two weight ranges to maximize running clearance. Example:
For 7" (177.8 mm) OD 29 lb/ft casing use packer size 70AB-40 x 32.
Repair kits, including such items as packing elements, seal rings, etc., are available for redressing Baker
Retrievable Packers. Contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative. Use only genuine Baker repair kits.
Model HP-1AH Packer

87
RETRIEVA-D™, • Tubing or tubing seals can be

removed without accidental
RETRIEVA-DB™, unsetting of the packer
RETRIEVA-DA™, • The packer is not affected by tub-
AND RETRIEVA-DAB™ ing expansion or contraction
• Retrieves easily because mov-
LOK-SET RETRIEVABLE able slips, cones and releasing
PACKERS mechanism are located below the
Product Family Nos. H64616, packing elements
H64618, H64622, and H64625 The Baker Retrieva-DA and DAB
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION Lok-Set Retrievable Packers are
the same as the Retrieva-D, except
The Retrieva-D Lok-Set Retrievable that the DA and DAB units have an
Casing Packer is a reliable and ver- enlarged seal bore at the upper
satile packer for production, injec- end. This feature makes it possible
tion, testing, and fracturing. All to have a larger bore through the
accessories for the Model D can be packer with accessories in place
used with the Retrieva-D. The Re- than is possible with the Retrieva-D
trieva-DB version has a threaded and DB Packers.
bottom sub to accept seal bore ex-
tensions or tailpipe. MODEL A™ RETRIEVA-D
These packers can be run and set AND MODEL A
on electric line, slick line or tubing RETRIEVA-DB LOK-SET
with the same setting tools used
with the Model D Retainer Produc- RETRIEVABLE CASING
tion Packer. PACKERS
All models of the Retrieva-D Pack- Product Family Nos. H64675,
ers are retrieved using the Retriev- H64676, H64677, and H64678
ing Tool, (Product Family No.
H64617) on tubing, drillpipe, or
sandline. Retrieval is accomplished Similar in features and function to
with a straight pull - no rotation is re- the standard Retrieva-D and Re-
quired. trieva-DB Packers, the Model A
versions provide increased tailpipe
FEATURES/BENEFITS load carrying capacity and a modi-
• Sets like the Model D Permanent fied releasing mechanism.
Packer, yet is retrievable
• The Retrieva-D comes in three FEATURES/BENEFITS
versions: with Blank Guide; with • Available in sizes for 6-5/8"
DB Threaded Bottom Guide, and (168.2 mm), 7" (177.8 mm),
with a Flapper Valve Guide 7-5/8" (193.6 mm), and 9-5/8"
• A dual lock ring system, in con- (244.4 mm) casings
junction with non-transferring • Uses same setting and retrieving
slips, maintains positive set tools as standard models
• Because the entire setting force • Uses same accessories as stan-
can be delivered to the packing dard models
elements, they can be made of • Provides increased tailpipe load
extremely hard rubber carrying capability
Baker Model A Retrieva-DB Packer

88
MODEL RETRIEVA-D, DB, DA, DAB AND MODEL A RETRIEVA-D, DB, DA AND DAB
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Retrieva-DA Retrieva-D and Retrieva-DA
Max Gage Ring (Upper) (Lower) #
OD Weight "
Size & OD Seal Min Bore Min Bore
Accessory Seal Bore ‡ Accessory
Bore Thru Seals Thru Seals
Size ' Size '
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
4-1/2 ( 114.3 95-11.6 43A 3.817 96.9
15-18 43B 4.130 104.9 21-23 1.807 45.9
5 127.0 3.000 76.2 20FA/SA30 2.390 60.7 2.390 60.7
11.5-15 20-23 1.703 43.2
43C 4.255 108.0
26
20-23 45A2 4.505∆ 114.4
5-1/2 139.7
15.5-20 45A4 4.646 118.0
13-15.5 40FA/SA36
40/80-26 1.968 49.9
45B 4.786 121.5 3.625 92.0 or 3.000 76.2 2.688 68.2
26 41/81-26 1.750 44.4
60DA36
6 152.4 20-23 45C 5.067 128.7
15-18 45D 5.161 130.0
26-28 46B) 5.606 142.3
- - - - -
6-5/8 168.2 20-24 46C) 5.718 145.2
17-20
47A4) 5.817 147.7
32-35
26-29 47B2) 5.973 151.7 60/80-32 2.406 61.1
7 177.8 3.250 85.2
23-26 47B4) 6.083 154.5 61/81-32 1.995 50.6
4.000 101.6 80DA40 3.250 82.5
17-20 47C2) 6.276 159.4
33.7-39 47C4) 6.458 164.0
7-5/8 193.6 24-29.7 47D2) 6.677 169.6
20-24 47D4) 6.817 173.1
82FA47⊕ 4.000 101.6
44-49 49A2 7.317 185.8
81FA47 3.875
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
98.4
82FA47⊕ 4.000 101.6
8-5/8 219.0 32-40 49A4 7.536 191.4 4.750 120.6 3.875 98.4 120-38 2.500 63.5
81FA47 3.875 98.4
SYSTEMS
82FA47⊕ 4.000 101.6
20-28 49B 7.786 197.7
81FA47 3.875 98.4
47-53.5 51A2) 8.281 210.3 192-47 3.875 98.43
9-5/8 244.4 40-47 51A4) 8.440 214.3 6.000 152.4 190DA60 4.875 123.8 4.875 12.8 190-47 3.000 76.2
29.3-36 51B) 8.608 218.6 191-47 2.500 63.5
! For information on packer or accessory sizes not found in this specification guide, refer to Baker Oil Tools' Packer Systems Technical Manual or your Baker
Oil Tools Representative.
# Lower bore can be utilized as a seal bore, HOWEVER, strict dimensional analysis for compatibility of packer bore/sealing accessory configuration is
required to assure desired performance. Compatibility is based on lower bore/seal nipple diametrical dimensions only. Final seating position of locating
shoulder will vary between packer sizes. Anchor mechanisms are not recommended.
" Includes some drillpipe and line pipe weights.
‡ The maximum OD (including tolerance) of any part run through a Baker Production Packer should be at least 1/16" (1.59 mm) smaller than the minimum
bore through the packer body. This may occasionally require that the coupling OD’s be turned down.
' Tubing seal assemblies, tubing seal and spacer nipples.
( In 4-1/2" (114.3 mm) OD 11.6 lb/ft and heavier casing, the size 20 wireline pressure setting assembly is too large and the size 10 WLPSA MUST BE USED.
In 4-1/2" (114.3 mm) OD 9.5 and 10.5 lb/ft casing, either the size 10 or 20 WLPSA may be used.
⊕ Accessory size 82FA47 replaces both previous sizes 80FA47 and 120DA47.
∆ Max OD of size 45A2 Retrieva-DA is 4.615" (117.2 mm). This tool should not be used in 5-1/2" (139.7 mm), 23lb/ft casing.
) Available as Model A Packer Only.
89
MODEL SC-2P™ • Retrieves easily because caged

slips and releasing mechanism
RETRIEVABLE PACKER are located in protected area
Product Family No. H64686 below packing element. Packer’s
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION releasing mechanism is not
affected by differential pressure
The Baker SC-2P Retrievable or tailpipe weight
Packer is a high performance re- • Utilizes the packing element sys-
trievable seal bore packer. tem developed for the Model HE
This packer can be run and set on Packer system in conjunction
electric line, slick line or tubing us- with packing element materials,
ing the same setting tools used with such as nitrile, Viton or Aflas,
the Model D Packer. which are selected for compatibil-
ity with specific well conditions for
FEATURES/BENEFITS maximum performance and
• Set with wireline or hydraulic set- downhole life
ting tools • Case hardened slips are suitable
• Can be equipped with a variety of for all grades of casing including
bottom guides. Guides must be V-150
ordered separately • Compatible with standard Baker
• Packer easily accommodates tub- Seal Accessories, Tubing Con-
ing expansion or contraction. Tub- veyed Perforating and Gravel
ing and seals can be removed Packing Systems
without accidental unsetting of the
packer
Model SC-2P Retrievable Packer

90
MODEL SC-2P RETRIEVABLE PACKER, PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H64686

SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer !
T&C Max Gage Max
OD
Weight ( Size # Ring OD Packing Element
20-23 55A2-26 4.485 113.9 4.406 111.9
5-1/2 139.7 17-20 55A4-26 4.593 116.6 4.500 114.3
13-15.5 55B-26 4.765 121.0 4.687 119.0
35-38 7OA2-32 5.735 145.6 5.687 144.4
29-32 7OA4-32 5.820 147.8 5.750 146.0
7 177.8
23-29 7OB-32 6.000 152.4 5.937 150.8
17-20 7OC-32 6.250 158.7 6.187 157.1
33.7-39 76A2-32' 76A2-40' 6.375 161.9 6.375 161.9
29.7-33.7 76A4-32' 76A4-40' 6.500 165.1 6.500 165.1
7-5/8 193.6
24-29.7 76B2-32' 76B2-40' 6.625 168.2 6.625 168.2
20-24 76B4-32' 76B4-40' 6.718 170.6 6.718 170.6
53.5-58.4 96A-47 8.191 208.0 8.125 206.3
47-53.5 96A2-47 8.319 211.3 8.250 209.5
9-5/8 244.4
40-47 96A4-47 8.465 215.0 8.375 212.7
36-40 96B-47 8.619 218.9 8.500 215.9
Seal Bore Dia for Seal Min Bore Thru

Size Seal Nipples " Accessory Seal Nipples
in. mm Size & in. mm
55A2-26
55A4-26 2.688 68.2 40-26 1.968 50.0
55B-26
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
7OA2-32
7OA4-32 80-32 2.406 61.1
SYSTEMS
7OB-32 3.250 82.5 or or or
7OC-32 81-32 1.995 50.6
76A2-32
76A2-40 4.000 101.6 80-40 3.000 72.6
80-32 2.406 61.1
76A4-32 3.250 82.5 or or or
81-32 1.995 50.6
76A4-40 4.000 101.6 80-40 3.000 72.6
80-32 2.406 61.1
76B2-32 3.250 82.5 or or or
81-32 1.995 50.6
76B2-40 4.000 101.6 80-40 3.000 72.6
80-32 2.406 61.1
76B4-32 3.250 82.5 or or or
81-32 1.995 50.6
76B4-40 4.000 101.6 80-40 3.000 72.6
96A-47
190-47 3.000 72.6
96A2-47
4.750 120.6 or or or
96A4-47
192-47 3.875 98.4
96B-47
! For information on packer or accessory sizes not found in this specification guide, refer to Baker Oil Tools'
Packer Systems Technical Manual or your Baker Oil Tools Representative.
# When proposed for use in other than the casing weight range shown, contact your Baker Oil Tools
Representative.
" The maximum OD (including tolerance) of any part run through a Baker Production Packer should be at
least 1/16" (1.59mm) smaller than the minimum bore through the packer body. This may occasionally
require that the coupling OD’s be turned down.
& Tubing seal assemblies, tubing seal and spacer nipples.
' This tool available with 3.250" (82.5 mm) or 4.000" (101.6 mm) seal bore diameter and uses sizes 80-32/
81-32 or 80-40 accessories respectively.
( When selecting a SC-2P Packer for a casing weight common to two size Packers choose the packer with
the smallest OD to maximize running clearances. Example: In 5-1/2" (139.7 mm), 20.0 lb/ft casing, use size
55A2-26.
91
MODEL ISO-PAK SINGLE applications, in which each zone is

individually perforated, stimulated
STRING HYDRAULIC and isolated, known as the Baker
PACKER PSI™ System.
FEATURES/BENEFITS
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION • No body movement during setting
allows multiple packers to be set
The Baker Iso-Pak Single String
on the same string
Hydraulic Packer is a retrievable
• Packer is only part of an inte-
seal bore packer specifically de-
grated system including running
signed for use in the Baker Horizon-
tools, service packers, side
tal Well Completion System. The
mounted tubing perforating guns,
Baker Horizontal Well Completion
thru-tubing release tools, etc.,
System consists of a combination of
• One-trip and stackable systems
CM Sliding Sleeves and Iso-Pak
save days of rig-time over con-
Packers to achieve multiple zone
ventionally deployed systems
isolation and selective stimulation
• Over 1,500 Baker Horizontal Well
capabilities. This modular system
Completions successfully
can be deployed in a single trip for
installed in 150 wells
pre-perforated wells, or can be run
in a stackable fashion for sand frac
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Seal Min Max
OD Weight Packer
Bore ID ID OD
Range Size
in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
5 127.0 15-18 43B 3.000 76.2 2.350 60.0 4.125 104.8
4.750 121.0
7 177.8 26-29 47B2 3.750 95.3 5.960 151.4
4.800 121.9
Model Iso-Pak Single

String Hydraulic Packer

RELIANT SERIES MODEL FEATURES/BENEFITS

WL™ WIRELINE SET
• Superior sealing system
SINGLE STRING • Elements - patented “zero gap”
RETRIEVABLE PACKER extrusion system
• O-rings - with Teflon backups
Product Family Nos.
• Fit for environment
H64710 (Standard Service)
• Metallurgies - standard service or
and H64711 (NACE Service)
NACE service
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION • Elastomers - nitrile, Viton or Aflas
• Rated to 10,000 psi (Standard
The WL Packer is a new wireline set Service) and 7,500 psi (NACE) @
retrievable high performance pro- 350°F (176.6°C)
duction packer. It is run-in combina- • Lab tested - fully tested in gas at
tion with the L-10 On/Off Tool. The maximum temperature with multi-
packer can be run as a temporary ple pressure reversals in maxi-
bridge plug by installing a blanking mum casing IDs
plug in the L-10 Seal Nipple above • Two-in-one tool - convert from
the packer, allowing remedial or temporary plug to packer by
stimulation work above the packer. removal of blanking plug
The plug can then be removed with • Retrieves on production tubing -
conventional wireline methods, al- does not require retrieving tool
lowing the well to be returned to
production.
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
SYSTEMS
Casing Packer
Weight Max Min Threads EU
OD
Range Size OD ID (Box x Pin)
13.5-15.1 365-188 3.650 92.7
4-1/2 114.3 11.6-13.5 375-188 3.750 95.3
9.5-11.6 1.885 47.9 2-3/8 60.3
384-188 3.840 97.5
21.4-23.2
5 127.0
15-18 410-188 4.100 104.1
450-193 1.930 49.0 2-3/8 60.3
5-1/2 139.7 15.5-23 4.500 114.3
450-237
35-38 573-237 5.730 145.5
7 177.8 26-32 591-237 5.910 150.1 2.373 60.3 2-7/8 73.0
23-26 608-237 6.080 154.4
645-237
33.7-39.0 6.450 163.8
645-292 2.919 74.1 3-1/2 88.9
7-5/8 193.7
659-237 2.373 60.3 2-7/8 73.0
26.4-33.7 6.590 167.4
659-292 2.922 74.2 3-1/2 88.9
Reliant Series Model WL Wireline


MULTIPLE FEED THROUGH

PACKER TECHNOLOGY
Baker Oil Tools' Multiple Feed Through Packer Technology allows cus-
tomers to install complex functionality in the wellbore. Secure passage
of control line communication through the packer and ancillary equip-
ment enables hydraulic sliding sleeves, instrumentation, and chemical
injection in the lower well bore.
This equipment combines proven Baker sealing, anchoring, and retriev-
ing technology to accommodate multiple feed through as an option on
several standard products, as well as special design products for spe-
cific applications.
Baker Multiple Feed Through Packers are tailored to the application and
generally include proprietary control line connections or continuous con-
trol line bypass. Packers require no mandrel movement to permit
stacked applications. Some packers can accommodate up to 12 control
line feed-thrus. An example of Multiple Feed Through application is
shown on page 47.
Model MFT Packer

94
MODEL A-5™ DUAL • With selective set versions, applica-

tions where it is desirable to test the
STRING RETRIEVABLE tubing string before packer setting or
PACKER to independently set and test individ-
ual packers in multiple packer com-
Product Family Nos. H78316, pletions
H78330, and H78331
FEATURES/BENEFITS
DESCRIPTION • Operationally simple, install and
The Model A-5 is the industry standard, retrieve multiple packers on the pro-
hydrostatic set and shear release dual duction string without tubing manipu-
string retrievable packer. The A-5 Pack- lation or well intervention:
er is hydraulically activated for hydro- • Hydraulically activated, Hydro-
static setting by applying a low tubing static Set - low pressure, rig pump
pressure against a plugging device be- capable activation
low the packer in the short string. The • Shear Release - allows packer to
packer requires only straight pull be released by simply pulling on
against the long string to release. the tubing string
• Built-in bypass - to aid in releasing
and retrieving
MODEL AL-5™ AND • Packoff is constantly reinforced by
ALS-5™ DUAL STRING hydrostatic pressure and mechani-
cally locked
RETRIEVABLE PACKER • Triple seal multi-durometer elements-
Product Family Nos. H78330 insure pressure integrity over a wide
and H78331 range of temperatures and conforms
easily to casing irregularities
DESCRIPTION • No mandrel movement during setting
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
allows stacked packer applications
The Model AL-5 is the long string set
version of the A-5 Packer. Features, ad-
SYSTEMS
ACCESSORIES
vantages, and operational procedures
are similar to those for the A-5 Packer. Short string seal assemblies or acces-
sories to remove the long string as well:
The Model ALS-5 is the selective set
• Snap Latch or Anchor Latch Seal
version of the ALS Packer. Setting and
Assembly, (Product Family Nos.
retrieval is essentially the same as the
H70032, H70703 and H70711)
A-5 with the exception of an inner
• Selective Head and Seal Nipple,
sleeve that must be shifted before the
(Product Family Nos. H78351 and
packer will set. The selective setting
H70373)
mechanism prevents the packer from
premature setting when high tubing to A tubing plugging device must be posi-
annulus pressure differentials are en- tioned below the packer for actuation:
countered or when tubing pressure • Model E Hydro-Trip Sub,
tests are performed. (Product Family No. H79928)
APPLICATIONS • Model CMU(D) Sliding Sleeve,
(Product Family Nos. H81079 and
• Production, injection and zonal isola-
H81080) with Blanking Plug
tion
• Baker Flow Control Seating Nipple
• Upper packer where the bottom
with Blanking Plug
packer is a single-bore packer, or as
• Other Hydraulic Setting Devices,
the upper or intermediate packer in
(Product Family Nos. H46921,
tandem or selective-tandem dual
H79928, and H75917)
completions
• Deviated wells or other applications To facilitate making tubing connections
where no rotation for installation or and to aid with space-out:
removal is desired • Adjustable and Telescoping Subs,
• Applications where displacing and (Product Family Nos. H44120 and
setting the packers after the well is H44125)
Model A-5 Dual String
Hydrostatic Dual Packer
flanged up is desirable Product Family No. H78316
95
MODEL A-5 HYDROSTATIC DUAL STRING RETRIEVABLE PACKER, PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H78316
MODEL AL-5 LONG STRING HYDROSTATIC DUAL STRING RETRIEVABLE PACKER,
PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H78316
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Size Max Gage
&
OD Weight
Without With Guide Ring
Selective Head Selective Head OD
in. mm lb/ft in. mm
20-23 45A (1.900 x 2.06) 45A (1.87 x 2.06) 4.500 114.3
5-1/2 139.7
14-17 45B (1.900 x 2.06) 45B (1.87 x 2.06) 4.641 117.8
6 152.4 15-23 45C (1.900 x 2.06) 45C (1.87 x 2.06) 5.062 128.5
32 46A (2-3/8 x 2.28) 5.437 138.1
24-28 46B2 (2-3/8 x 2.28) 5.625 142.8
20-24 46B3 (2-3/8 x 2.28) - 5.750 146.0
6-5/8 168.2 20 46B4 (2-3/8 x 2.28) 5.812 147.6
47C2 (2-7/8 x 2.28)
17 47C2 (2-3/8 x 2.28) 47C2 (2.50 x 2.68) 5.942 150.9
46B2 (2-3/8 x 2.28) 47C2 (2.50 x 2.28)
38 46B2 (2-3/8 x 2.28) 5.625 142.8
35-38 46B3 (2-3/8 x 2.28) 5.750 146.0
-
35 46B4 (2-3/8 x 2.28) 5.812 147.6
47C2 (2-7/8 x 2.28)
23-32 47C2 (2-3/8 x 2.68) 47C2 (2.50 x 2.68) 5.942 150.9
47C2 (2-3/8 x 2.28) 47C2 (2.50 x 2.28)
7 177.8
47C4 (2-7/8 x 2.28) -
20-26 47C4 (2-3/8 x 2.68) 47C4 (2.50 x 2.68) 6.108 155.1
47C4 (2-3/8 x 2.28) 47C4 (2.50 x 2.28)
47C6 (2-7/8 x 2.28) -
17-20 47C6 (2-3/8 x 2.68) 47C6 (2.50 x 2.68) 6.281 159.5
47C6 (2-3/8 x 2.28) 47C6 (2.50 x 2.28)
47D2 (2-7/8 x 2.28) 47D2 (2.50 x 2.68)
47D2 (2-3/8 x 2.68) 6.468 164.2
33.7-39 47D2 (2.50 x 2.28)
47D2 (2-3/8 x 2.28)
48A (2-7/8 x 2.68) - 6.453 163.9
7-5/8 193.6
47D4 (2-7/8 x 2.28) 47D4 (2.50 x 2.68)
47D4 (2-3/8 x 2.68) 6.687 169.8
24-29.7 47D4 (2.50 x 2.28)
47D4 (2-3/8 x 2.28)
48B (2-7/8 x 2.68) - 6.718 170.6
44-49 49A (2-7/8 x 3.25) 49A (2.84 x 3.25) 7.250 184.1
8-5/8 219.0 36-40 49B (2-7/8 x 3.25) 49B (2.84 x 3.25) 7.437 188.9
24-32 49C (2-7/8 x 3.25) 49C (2.84 x 3.25) 7.687 195.2
51A (3-1/2 x 3.75) 51A (3.31 x 3.75)
53.5 51A (3-1/2 x 3.25) 8.322 211.3
51A (3.31 x 3.25)
51A (3-1/2 x 2.68)
51B (3-1/2 x 3.75) 51B (3.31 x 3.75)
9-5/8 244.4 40-47 51B (3-1/2 x 3.25) 8.510 216.1
51B (3.31 x 3.25)
51B (3-1/2 x 2.68)
51C (3-1/2 x 3.75) 51C (3.31 x 3.75)
29.3-36 51C (3-1/2 x 3.25) 8.697 220.9
51C (3.31 x 3.25)
51C (3-1/2 x 2.68)
40-47 51B (4-1/2 x 3.25) - 8.510 216.1
96
MODEL A-5 AND MODEL AL-5 (CONTINUED)

SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Packer
Long String Short String
Min Bore Thru
With Selective Head
Seal Nipple
Nom ID Standard Thread Max Nom ID
Thru Packer Min Thru Packer Product
Specification Upward Force Seal Nipple Size
Bore Thru Family No.
Box Up (C Nipple) and Thru C Nipple
C Nipple H70703
Pin Down (Packer) and Packer
in. mm in. in. mm lbs daN in. mm in. mm
1.562 39.6 1.900 OD EU 10 Rd 1.557 39.5 50,000 22240 1.521 38.6 2.06
1.562 39.6
1.938 49.2
- - - - -
2.378 60.3
2-3/8 OD EU 8 Rd 1.937 49.2 70,000 31136 1.938 49.2
1.938 49.2
- - - - - 1.562 39.6
2.375 60.3
1.695 43.0 2.28

1.938 49.2 2-3/8 OD EU 8 Rd 1.937 49.2 70,000 31136 1.938 49.2
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
or or or
2.375 60.3 - - - - - 1.562 39.6
SYSTEMS
1.968 49.9 2.68
1.938 49.2 2-3/8 OD EU 8 Rd 1.937 49.2 70,000 31136 1.939 49.2
2.375 60.3 - - - - - 1.562 39.6
1.938 49.2 1.938 49.2
2.375 60.3 1.562 39.6

2-3/8 OD EU 8 Rd 1.937 49.2 70,000 31136
1.938 49.2
1.938 49.2
- - - - -
2.375 60.3
1.562 39.6
2-3/8 OD EU 8 Rd 1.937 49.2 70,000 31136
1.938 49.2
1.938 49.2
- - - - -
2.375 60.3 2-7/8 OD EU 8 Rd 2.422 61.5 75,000 33360 2.375 60.3 2.375 60.3 3.25
1.968 49.9 2.68
or or or
3.000 76.2 3-1/2 OD EU 8 Rd 2.875 73.0 100,000 44480 3.000 76.2 2.375 60.3 3.25
or or or
3.000 76.2 3.75

4.000 101.6 - - - - - 2.375 60.3 2.375 60.3 3.25
97
MODEL J™ SINGLE-GRIP downs activated by pressure from

below the packing elements which
AND J™ SNAP-SET would otherwise tend to unset the
DOUBLE GRIP DUAL packer and move it up the hole.
PACKER APPLICATIONS
Product Family Nos. H75601 • Non-deviated, medium depth
and H75701 dual completions
FEATURES/BENEFITS
MODEL K™ SINGLE- • Minimum number of o-rings as
GRIP AND K™ SNAP-SET compared to hydraulic set dual
DOUBLE GRIP DUAL string packers
• Triple seal multi-durometer
PACKER elements - insure pressure integ-
Product Family Nos. H75401 rity over a wide range of tempera-
and H75501 tures and conforms easily to
casing irregularities
DESCRIPTION
ACCESSORIES
The Model J is a compression set,
long string tension release dual Short string seal assemblies and
string retrievable packer. The J accessories to provide optional re-
snap-sets by applying compression lease of the long string:
from either the long string or short
• Snap Latch or Anchor Latch Seal
string against the long string tailpipe
Assembly, Product Family Nos.
which is stung into a lower sealbore
H70032, H70703 and H70711
packer. This set-down weight sets
the slips and packs off the packing • Selective Head and Seal Nipple,
elements. Product Family Nos. H78351 and
H70373
The Model K is a compression set,
short string tension release dual To facilitate making tubing connec-
string packer. The K snap-sets by tions and aid with space-out:
applying compression from the
• Adjustable and Telescoping
short string against the long string.
Subs, Product Family Nos.
This set-down weight sets the slips
H44120 and H44125
and packs off the packing elements.
Both J and K come in double-grip
versions containing hydraulic hold-
Model J Single-Grip
Snap-Set Dual Packer
98
MODEL J AND MODEL K DUAL PACKER

SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Long String Short String
ID Range in Which Max Gage
Packer May be Run Seal Nipple, Product
& Nom ID Nom ID
OD Weight Seal Family No. H70703
Size Guide Ring Thru Thru
OD Bore Min Bore
Min Max Packer Packer
Size Thru
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
18 4.276 108.6 4.375 111.1 44B (1.900 x 1.53) 4.062 1037
5 127.0 15 4.408 112.0 4.500 114.3 44B2 (1.900 x 1.53) 4.125 104.7 1.530 38.8 1.000 25.4 1.53 1.000 25.4
1.563 39.7
11.5-13 4.484 113.9 4.562 115.9 44C (1.900 x 1.53) 4.281 108.7
45A (1.900 x 2.06) 4.500 114.3 2.062 52.3 1.563 39.7 2.06 1.521 38.6
20-23 4.670 118.6 4.778 121.4 45A (2-1/16 x 1.53) 4.510 114.5 1.688 42.8
1.530 38.8 1.000 25.4 1.53 1.000 25.4
45A (2-3/8 x 1.53) 4.500 114.3 1.938 49.2
5-1/2 139.7
45B (1.900 x 2.06) 4.641 117.8 1.563 39.7 2.062 52.3 1.563 39.7 2.06 1.521 38.6
14-17 4.778 121.4 5.012 127.3 45B (2-1/16 x 1.53) 4.651 118.1 1.688 42.8
1.530 38.8 1.000 25.4 1.53 1.000 25.4
45B (2-3/8 x 1.53) 4.641 117.8 1.938 49.2
45C (1.900 x 2.06) 1.563 39.7 2.062 52.3 1.563 39.7 2.06 1.521 38.6
6 152.4 15-23 5.190 131.8 5.552 141.0 5.062 128.5
45C (2-3/8 x 1.53) 1.530 38.8 1.000 25.4 1.53 1.000 25.4
32 5.595 142.1 5.675 144.1 46A (2-3/8 x 2.28) 5.437 138.1 2.281 57.9 1.563 39.6 2.28 1.695 43.0
24-28 5.921 150.4 46B (2-3/8 x 2.28) 5.625 142.8
5.761 146.3 2.687 68.2 1.938 49.2 2.68 1.968 49.9
20-24 46C (2-3/8 x 2.28) 5.708 144.9
1.938 49.2
20 6.094 154.8 1.563 39.7
6-5/8 168.2 5.989 152.1 46B4 (2-3/8 x 2.28) 5.812 147.6
2.281 57.9 2.28 1.695 43.0
47C2 (2-3/8 x 2.28)

17 6.094 154.8 6.366 161.7 47C2 (2-3/8 x 2.68) 5.942 150.9 2.687 68.2 1.938 49.2 2.68 1.968 49.9
47C2 (2-7/8 x 2.28) 2.375 60.3
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
2.281 57.9 2.28 1.695 43.0
38 5.921 150.4 46B2 (2-3/8 x 2.28) 5.625 142.8
5.761 146.3
35-38 46 (2-3/8 x 2.68) 5.708 144.4 2.687 68.2 1.938 49.2 2.28 1.695 43.0
SYSTEMS
6.094 154.8
32-35 5.989 152.1 46B4 (2-3/8 x 2.28) 5.812 147.6 1.938 49.2 1.563 39.7
2.281 57.9 2.28 1.695 43.0
7 177.8 47C2 (2-3/8 x 2.28)

23-32 6.094 154.8 6.366 161.7 47C2 (2-3/8 x 2.68) 5.942 150.9 2.687 68.2 1.938 49.2 2.68 1.968 49.9
47C2 (2-7/8 x 2.28) 2.375 60.3
2.281 57.9 2.28 1.695 43.0
47C6 (2-3/8 x 2.28)
1.938 49.2 1.938 49.2
17-20 6.456 164.0 6.562 166.7 47C6 (2-3/8 x 2.68) 6.281 159.5 2.687 68.2 2.68 1.968 49.9
47C6 (2-7/8 x 2.28) 2.375 60.3 1.563 39.7
2.281 57.9 2.28 1.695 43.0
47D2 (2-3/8 x 2.28)
1.938 49.2
33.7-39 6.625 168.3 6.875 174.6 47D2 (2-3/8 x 2.68) 6.468 164.2 2.687 68.2 2.68 1.968 49.9
47D2 (2-7/8 x 2.28) 2.375 60.3
7-5/8 193.6 2.281 57.9 1.938 49.2 2.28 1.595 43.0
47D4 (2-3/8 x 2.28)
1.938 49.2
24-29.7 6.875 174.6 7.025 178.4 47D4 (2-3/8 x 2.68) 6.687 469.8 2.687 68.2 2.68 1.968 49.9
47D4 (2-7/8 x 2.28) 2.281 57.9 2.28 1.595 43.0
44-49 7.451 189.3 7.65 193.7 49A (2-7/8 x 3.25) 7.250 184.1
2.375 60.3
8-5/8 219.0 36-40 7.663 194.6 7.825 198.8 49B (2-7/8 x 3.25) 7.437 188.9 2.375 60.3
3.250 82.5 3.25 2.375 60.3
24-32 7.925 210.3 8.097 205.7 49C (2-7/8 x 3.25) 7.687 195.2
51A (3-1/2 x 3.25)
53.5 8.535 216.8 8.608 218.6 8.322 211.3
51B (3-1/2 x 3.75) 3.750 95.2 3.75 3.000 76.2
51B (3-1/2 x 3.25) 3.250 82.5 3.25 2.375 60.3
9-5/8 244.4 40-47 8.681 220.5 8.835 224.4 8.510 216.1 3.000 76.2 3.000 76.2
51B (3-1/2 x 3.75) 3.750 95.2 3.75 3.000 76.2
51C (3-1/2 x 3.25) 3.250 82.5 3.25 2.375 60.3
29.3-36 8.885 225.7 9.063 230.2 8.697 220.9
51C (3-1/2 x 3.75) 3.750 95.2 3.75 3.000 76.2
! When selecting a packer for a casing weight common to two weight ranges (same OD), choose the packer size shown for the lighter of the two weight ranges.
Example: For 7" (177.8 mm) 32 lb/ft casing use packer size 47C2. Under certain circumstances the other packer size may be run, such as when running in
mixed casing strings.
# Size 44 packers available in Model J only.
99
TWIN SEAL™ ELECTRIC The packer is set with hydraulic

pressure, straight pull releases it.
SUBMERSIBLE PUMP The twin packing elements above
PACKER and below the slips allow the pack-
Product Family No. H78540 er to maintain the same pressure
rating from either direction.
FEATURES/BENEFITS
The Twin Seal Packer is a field
• High performance rating:
proven, high-performance packer
5,000 psi and 275°F
specially designed for deployment
• Twin packing elements protect
of Electric Submersible Pumps. The
the slip system from debris, eas-
packer is provided with a large bore
ing packer release
production mandrel and a electrical
• Reliable hydraulic setting mecha-
cable feed-through adaptable to
nism simplifies running proce-
use popular cable packoff systems.
dures
In addition, there are two smaller
• Packer can be spaced-out in neu-
feed-throughs that may be used for
tral, compression or tension, pro-
an annular gas vent valve, and in-
viding completion flexibility
strumentation and chemical injec-
• Full bore production mandrel
tion lines. There is no relative
reduces flow restrictions in high
movement between the strings
volume wells
when setting or releasing the pack-
• Control-line setting option avail-
er, eliminating unwanted cable
able on special order
strain.
• Coil-tubing deployed version
available
Twin Seal Electric

Submersible Pump Packer
100

TWIN SEAL ELECTRICAL SUBMERSIBLE PUMP PACKER, PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H78540
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Optional
Max Size Production Tubing String Secondary String Optional Vent Tubes # Bypass Gas
Max
Gage !#
Casing Weight Packer Packing
Ring
Size Element Less BIW Penetrator
OD With BIW Less BIW Min ID Std Thd With BIW Pen Max Nom ID Std Thd Std
Min ID
Penetrator Penetrator Box x Pin & Volt/AMP Qty. Box x Pin Box Up
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm Box x Pin & in. mm
29-32 47C2 5.943 150.9 2-3/8 EU 8 Rd 2-3/8 NU 10 Rd
5.938 150.8 2-3/8 x PEN 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 1.922 48.8
26-29 47C4 6.000 152.4 x 2.062 52.3 x "
2-3/8 NU 10 Rd 2-3/8 NU 10 Rd
7 177.8 23-26 47C6 6.109 155.1 or or
6.094 154.7 2-7/8 x PEN 2-7/8 x 1.900 2.375 60.3 2-7/8 NU 10 Rd 1.900 NU 10 Rd
20-23 47C8 6.203 157.5 x 1.521 38.6 x
2-7/8 NU 10 Rd 4 KV / 100 AMP 2 .750 19.0 3/4 NPT
17-20 47C10 6.250 158.7 1.900 NU 10 Rd
33.7-39 48D2 6.438 163.5
6.375 161.9 2-7/8 EU 8 Rd 2-3/8 NU 10 Rd
29.7-33.7 48D4 6.562 166.6
7-5/8 193.6 2-7/8 x PEN 2-7/8 x 2-3/8 2.441 62.0 x 2.062 52.3 x
26.4-29.7 48D6 6.703 170.2 2-7/8 NU 10 Rd 2-3/8 NU 10 Rd
6.656 169.0
24-26.4 48D8 6.796 172.6
44-49 49A2 7.312 185.7 2-7/8 EU 8 Rd 1.900 NU 10 Rd
8-5/8 219.0 7.411 189.0 2-7/8 x PEN 2-7/8 x 1.900 2.441 62.0 x 1.521 38.6 x 1-1/4 NPT
36-40 49A4 7.546 191.6 2-7/8 NU 10 Rd 1.900 NU 10 Rd
53.5-58.4 51A2 8.265 209.9
8.203 208.3 4 KV / 125 AMP 3 1.000 25.4
47-53.5 51A4 8.328 211.5 4-1/2 x 2-3/8 4-1/2 LTC 2-3/8 EU 8 Rd
9-5/8 244.4 43.5-47 51A6 8.453 214.7 4-1/2 x PEN or 3.860 98.0 x 2.015 51.1 x 1.00 NPT
40-43.5 51A8 8.500 216.2 8.359 212.3 3-1/2 x 3-1/2 # 4-1/2 LTC 2-3/8 NU 10 Rd
36-40 51A10 8.594 218.2
5-1/2 LTC 2-3/8 NU 10 Rd
10-3/4 273.0 51-55.5 53D" 9.585 243.4 9.470 240.5 5-1/2 x PEN 5-1/2 x 2-3/8 4.946 125.6 x 4 KV / 125 AMP 1.920 48.7 x 1 .687 17.4
5-1/2 LTC 2-3/8 NU 10 Rd
! Available only on packers which are equipped with drop-in penetrators or cable feed-through.
# Optional feature, supplied on special request only.
" Contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative for information concerning these alternate size configurations.
& Threads shown before are “standard” for the respective packer sizes. Other threads are available on request. Please specify thread when ordering.
Repair kits, including such items as packing elements, seal rings, etc., are available for redressing Baker Retrievable Packers.
Contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative. Use only Baker repair kits.
Baker Oil Tools

101
SYSTEMS
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
MODEL D-ESP™ setting the packer which allows

stacked packer arrangements.
ELECTRIC
SUBMERSIBLE PUMP FEATURES/BENEFITS
• Short, economical design suitable
PACKER for most ESP installations
Product Family No. H78560 • Pressure and temperature rating:
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION 2,500 psi (172.4 bar) and 200°F
(93°C)
The Model D-ESP Packer is a • Fewer parts simplify running and
short, economical packer designed servicing the packer, reduces
for deployment of Electric Submers- potential leak paths
ible Pumps. The simple, compact • Hydraulic set and straight pull/
(less than 3 ft (1 m) long) design shear release simplifies operation
minimizes the number of parts, • Short compact design easier to
making running and servicing easi- make up on the string
er. The solid body configuration • Multiple ports through packer
eliminates relative movement be- available by special order
tween strings and permits optional • Available in Standard and H2S
porting configuration for multiple in- service materials
strumentation and chemical injec-
tion lines, and gas venting. No
downward movement is required for
Model D-ESP Electric

Submersible Pump Packer
102
MODEL D-ESP ELECTRIC SUBMERSIBLE PUMP PACKER, PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H78560
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Primary String ! Secondary String !
Weight Max Gage Optional
OD Packer Nom Nom
Range OD Standard Standard Additional
Size ID ID
Thread Thread Ports!
2.375" NU 10 Rd 3" x 3/8" NPT
5-1/2 139.7 15.5-17 45A4 4.645 118.0 1.989 50.5 0.578 14.7
Box x Box Box x Blank
2.875" EU 8 Rd 1.900" NU 10 Rd
26-29 47 5.990 152.1
Box x Box Box x Box
7 177.8 2.364 60.0 1.380 35.1
2.875" New VAM 1.900" NU 10 Rd
20-26 47C4 6.121 155.5 Yes
Box x Pin Box x Box
3.500" NU 10 Rd 2.875" EU 8 Rd
43.5-47 51 8.468 215.1
9-5/8 244.5 3.000 76.2 1.909 48.5
3.500" NU 10 Rd 2.875" EU 8 Rd
36-47 51AB 8.500 215.9
! Other thread configurations available. Contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative for details.
Baker Oil Tools

103
SYSTEMS
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
MODEL GT™ AND • Hydraulically set

• Shear release - allows packer to be
GT-S™ DUAL STRING released by simply pulling on either
RETRIEVABLE PACKER tubing string
• Built-in bypass - to aid in releasing and
Product Family Nos. H78509 retrieving
(Standard Service), H78510 • Hydraulic interlock system prevents
(NACE Service), and H78515 preset - all components are mechani-
(Selective Set) cally locked to the mandrel during run
in
DESCRIPTION • Reliable performance - defined by per-
The Model GT is the new standard for formance envelopes which graphically
high performance dual string retrievable describe simultaneous effects of load
hydraulic set and shear release packers. and pressure
The GT offers features that provide max- • Patented element system - incorpo-
imum pre-set prevention while running, rates a “zero gap” back-up system
improved sealing and retrieving reliability, • Superior O-ring and back-up design
and maximum flexibility to be configured allow testing of all O-rings during
for fit-for-purpose applications. The sim- assembly of the packer
ple and reliable design incorporates a • Bi-directional slip eliminates the extra
versatile packing element system that is leak paths associated with hydraulic
ideally suited for high pressure gas wells. hold-down buttons
• Unique arrangement of shear rings
The Model GT-S is the selective set ver- improves retrieving reliability and flexi-
sion of the GT. Setting and retrieval is es- bility
sentially the same as the GT with the • Short, compact design
exception of an inner sleeve that must be • No mandrel movement during setting
shifted before the packer will set. The se- allows stacked packer applications
lective setting optional module prevents • Selective setting achieved by adding
the packer from premature setting when on a selective setting module with mini-
high tubing to annulus pressure differen- mal effort
tials are encountered or when tubing
pressure tests are performed. OPTIONS
Packer can be configured for short string
APPLICATIONS removal:
• Production, injection and zonal isola- • GT DSR with Parallel Head, Short
tion String Set, Product Family No. H78511
• Upper packer where the bottom packer • GT DSR with Parallel Head, Long
is a single-bore packer, or as the upper String Set, Product Family No. H78512
or intermediate packer in tandem or
selective-tandem dual completions ACCESSORIES
• Horizontal, extended reach or any other Pin x pin packer configuration can be
completions where maximum pre-set modified allowing short string or both
prevention while running is desired. strings to be removed:
• Deviated wells or other applications • Parallel Head with Snap Latch or
where no rotation for installation or Anchor Latch Seal Assembly, Product
removal is desired Family Nos. H70032, H70703 and
• Applications where displacing and set- H70711
ting the packers after the well is flanged • Selective Head and Seal Nipple, Prod-
up is desirable uct Family Nos. H78351 and H70373
• With selective set versions, applica- To facilitate making tubing connections
tions where it is desirable to test the and to aid with space-out:
tubing string before packer setting or to • Adjustable and Telescoping Subs,
independently set and test individual Product Family Nos. H44120 and
packers in multiple packer completions H44125
FEATURES/BENEFITS
• Operationally simple, install and
retrieve multiple packers on the pro-
Model GT Dual String
duction string without tubing manipula-
Retrievable Packer tion or well intervention

Rev., April, 2003
MODEL GT HYDRAULIC SET DUAL STRING PACKER,

PRODUCT FAMILY NOS H78509 AND H78510
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Nom ID Max Gage
OD Weight Packer
Non-Ported Ported OD
Range Size
26-32 47C2 5.937 150.8
7 177.8
20-26 47C4 6.120 155.4
1.939 49.3 1.939 49.3
33.7-39 47D2 6.470 164.3
7-5/8 193.7
26.4-33.7 47D4 6.625 168.3
47-53.5 51A 8.350 212.1
9-5/8 244.5 2.939 74.7 2.939 74.7
40-47 51B 8.500 215.9
MODEL GT-S HYDRAULIC SET DUAL STRING PACKER, PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H78515
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Weight Nom ID Max Gage
OD Packer
Range Non-Ported Ported OD
Size
2.815 71.5
47-53.5 51A 8.350 212.1
with
9-5/8 244.5 2.939 74.7
2.812 71.4
40-47 51B 8.500 215.9
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
“B” Profile
SYSTEMS
MODEL GT WITH PARALLEL HEAD, PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H78515
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Packer Min Bore Thru
Size Seal Nipple
in. in. mm
47C2 2-3/8 x 2.68
47C4 2-3/8 x 2.68
1.968 50.0
47D2 2-3/8 x 2.68
47D4 2-3/8 x 2.68
51A 3-1/2 x 3.25 2.375 60.3
51A 3-1/2 x 3.75 3.000 76.2
51B 3-1/2 x 3.25 2.375 60.3
51B 3-1/2 x 3.75 3.000 76.2
105
MUDLINE TUBING the set position. If ordered with a

burst disc option, further pressure
HANGER increase will burst the disc, permit-
Product Family No. H79101 ting well displacement above the
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION MLTH.
The Baker Mud-Line Tubing Hang- FEATURES/BENEFITS

er (MLTH) is used to manage riser/ • Easily set with control line
vessel loading for off-shore comple- • Multi-use resetting feature
tions. It is designed to handle the • Shear released/cut-to-release
extremely high tensile loads in un- • Extremely high tubing tension
supported casing that are required capabilities
when completing wells from deep- • Fluid displacement feature avail-
water, tension leg platforms. able
• Multiple control line bypass capa-
The MLTH is set with control line bility for Chemical Injection, TEC
and incorporates a special multi- and/or SCSSV control lines
use re-setting feature, which allows • Slip design for symmetrical load-
the MLTH to be re-positioned in or- ing of unsupported casing
der to improve tubing space out. • Control line bypass between slips;
Once the correct setting location no feed-throughs or splices
has been achieved, a final pressure necessary
application to a higher, pre-deter-
mined value, will lock the MLTH into
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Max Min ID Max Max
Gage Ring through Hanging Casing
OD Weight Size
OD L.S. Body Weight ! Pressure
in. mm lb/ft in. mm in. mm lbs kg PSI bar
7 177.8 32-38 47A 5.695 144.6 300,000 136,000
2.912 73.9
7-5/8 193.6 29.7-39 47D 6.400 162.5 250,000 113,000 8,000 550
8-5/8 219.0 40-44 49A 7.300 185.0 3.853 98.0 130,000 58,900
9-5/8 244.0 47-53 300,000 136,000 5,000 345
51A 8.38 213.0 3.680 93.0
9-7/8 251.0 62.8 350,000 158,700
8,000 550
10-3/4 273.0 60.7 53 9.400 238.7 4.578 116.3 500,000 226000
! Note: Max hanging weight is dependent upon casing grade and weight, and casing pressure.
Mudline Tubing Hanger (MLTH)


MODEL FLX™ stress levels, and allow the hanger

to support combined axial and hy-
PACK-OFF TUBING draulic loads from 800,000 to well
HANGER over 1,000,000 pounds, depending
Product Family Nos. H79080 on the casing size and weight
and H79085 range.
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION Custom features may be incorpo-

rated to satisfy specific require-
Baker Oil Tools has developed a ments, such as: one-or two-trip set,
comprehensive Subsurface Annu- annulus or tubing set, multiple
lus Safety System (SASS) capable I-wire bypass, chemical injection
of acting as a secondary subsur- line bypass, top end workover facil-
face wellhead. The FLX System ity, concentric or poppet annular
shuts-in the annulus and tubing flow safety valve, and dual bore capabil-
should a disaster at surface result in ity.
loss of the wellhead. Its robust de-
sign enables the system to handle FEATURES/BENEFITS
all combined loads generated in • Field-proven element and slips
such a disaster. Commonly, this is • Offers “redundant wellhead”
called “redundant wellhead” capa- capability
bility. • High tubing tension capability
• No body movement
Normally, the system comprises a • Multiple feed-through for chemical
packoff tubing hanger, annulus injection, TEC, and control lines
safety valve, tubing safety valve, • Calibrated tensile safety joint
concentric tubing anchor, and cali- available
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
brated tensile safety joint. • Available in single and dual bore
SYSTEMS
The bi-directional slip design used • Available in 9-5/8" (244.5 mm)
in the Model FLX Pack-Off Tubing and 10-3/4" (273.1 mm) sizes
Hanger has been thoroughly field- • Contact your local Baker Oil Tools
proven on Flex-Lok Linger Hanger Representative for performance
Systems and features large, evenly ratings
spaced, casing contact for use in • Contingency retrieval methods
unsupported production casing. available
These features minimize casing
Model FLX Pack-Off Tubing Hanger


Rev., April, 2003
RETRIEVABLE trip. After retrieval, fullbore access

to the lower lateral is again re-
TORQUEMASTER™ stored.
PACKER
FEATURES/BENEFITS
• Packing element above slip sys-
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION tem to prevent debris from fouling
retrieval
The Retrievable TorqueMaster
• Retrieval system not affected by
Whipstock Packer from Baker Oil
tailpipe weight or differential pres-
Tools incorporates all the perfor-
sure
mance enhancements of the al-
• Weldless construction
ready field-proven permanent
• Rated for 7,500 psi (517.1 bar),
version with the added benefit of
and 350°F (177°C)
one-trip full retrievability. The sys-
• Rated for 20,000 ft-lbs
tem is rated for 20,000 ft-lbs
(2766 kg-m) of torque in either
(2766 kg-m) of torque, 7,500 psi
direction
(517.1 bar), and 350°F (177°C)
• Special debris management sys-
when run with the Reliant Packing
tem can be incorporated to pre-
Element System. It is specially de-
vent debris from accumulating
signed for multilateral applications
around the TorqueMaster Packer
where the lower zone requires iso-
and fouling the release mecha-
lation during drilling of the upper
nism
zone. It can be run in conjunction
• Applicable with WindowMaster,
with the WindowMaster One-trip
ML, CT, or Type E Window Milling
Window Milling System, Multilateral
Systems
Whipstock System, or Coiled Tub-
• Orientation can be performed with
ing Whipstock System. When run
MWD method
with the WindowMaster System,
• No bottom required to activate
only one-trip is required to orient the
anchor
whipstock, set the packer and mill
• Packer can be set by pressuring
the window. Once the lateral is
the annulus or drillpipe
completed, the entire system then
can be retrieved with one drillpipe
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Size Max
Weight Packer
OD OD
Size !
in. mm lb/ft in. mm
29-32 591 5.910 150.1
7 177.8
23-26 608 6.080 154.4
47-53.5 831 8.312 211.1
9-5/8 244.5
40-47 845 8.450 214.6
! Packer size example.
591 denotes 5.910 in packer OD.
Retrievable TorqueMaster Packer


PREMIER™ FEATURES/BENEFITS
• Slip-Element-Slip - gripping slips
REMOVABLE isolated from high pressure
PRODUCTION PACKER • Large ID - ID's similar to large bore
Product Family No. H78463 permanent packer
• High performance - tested to ISO
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION 14310 VO requirement
The Premier™ Packer is a hydraulic • Multiple retrieval on production
set, large bore removable production tubing - thru-tubing chemical or
packer. This unique packer com- mechanical cut or shear release
bines the performance of a perma- • Multiple retrieval on workstring -
nent packer with the conveniences retrieving tool or milling tool
of a retrievable packer. • Retrievable back-up system - pat-
The Premier Packer can be threaded ented, field-proven, retrievable,
directly to the production string or zero extrusion back-up rings
connected with an anchor seal as- • Positive debris barrier - protects
sembly. One-trip setting is accom- slips from deposits and debris for
plished by pressuring up against a assured retrieval
plugging device below the packer. • Multiple setting options - config-
Interventionless setting methods, urable for traditional or interven-
such as control line set, and rupture tionless setting
disc set, are also available. Retrieval • No body movement during setting -
on the production string is accom- ideal for single or multiple packer
plished by cutting the mandrel with a completions
chemical or mechanical cutting tool. • Simple, robust design - uses
A shear release option is available proven technologies from Reliant
RETRIEVABLE PACKER
for medium service applications. Series M™ and WL™ Retrievable
Packer
The Premier Packer is ideally suited
SYSTEMS
• Modular design - packer config-
for big bore completions and multi-
urable for threaded connections or
zone stacked packer completions.
upper sealbore
Its retrieving options offer new alter-
natives in high intervention cost ap-
plications.
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer
Optional Upper
OD Weight Max OD Min ID
Size Sealbore ! Elastomers
5-1/2 139.7 20 - 23 450-(36x)239 4.500 114.3 3.625 92.1 2.390 60.7 Aflas®
582-(47x)387 3.875 98.4
4.750 120.7
32 - 35 582-(47x)376 5.820 147.8 3.760 95.5
582-(36x)287 3.625 92.1 2.870 72.9
591-(47x)387 3.875 98.4
4.750 120.7
7 177.8 29 - 32 591-(47x)376 5.910 150.1 3.760 95.5
591-(36x)287 3.625 92.1 2.870 72.9
598-(47x)387 3.875 98.4
4.750 120.7
26 - 29 598-(47x)376 5.983 152.0 3.760 95.5
598-(36x)287 3.625 92.1 2.870 72.9
645-(47x)387 3.875 98.4
33.7 - 39 6.450 163.8 HNBR, Nitrile,
645-(47x)376 3.760 95.5
7-5/8 193.6 4.750 120.7 and Aflas®
659-(47x)387 3.875 98.4
29.7 - 33.7 6.590 167.4
659-(47x)376 3.760 95.5
831-(60x)490 4.900 124.5
6.000 155.8
47 - 53.5 831-(60x)475 8.310 221.1 4.750 120.7
831-(47x)387 4.750 120.7 3.875 98.4
9-5/8 244.5
845-(60x)490 4.900 124.5
6.000 155.8
40 - 47 845-(60x)475 8.450 214.6 4.750 120.7
845-(47x)387 4.750 120.7 3.875 98.4
934-(73x)600 7.375 187.3 6.000 155.8
10-3/4 273.1 60.7 - 65.7 9.345 237.3 Premier Removable Production Packer
934-(60x)475 6.000 155.8 4.750 120.7
!When upper sealbore is used, the packer can be retrieved on the workstring using the Premier™ Workstring Retrieving Tool
(POWER), Product Family No. H78464.

Baker Oil Tools
NOTES
110
ACCESSORIES Baker Oil Tools
ACCESSORIES SELECTION CHART

Catalog
Permanent Retrievable Dual
Page
Casing Cleanup Systems 112 x x x
Packer Setting Systems 113 x x
Packer Retrieving Systems 116 x
Seal Assemblies 118 x x
Seal Expansion/Disconnect Devices 127 x
Disconnect Devices 129 x
Expansion Joints 131 x x x
Spacing Devices 134 x
Multi-String Sealing Accessories 135 x
Safety Joints 137 x x
Parallel Flow Systems 139 x x
Plugging Devices 140 x x x
Unloaders 145 x x
Packer Extensions 146 x x
Production String Accessories 147 x x x
Interventionless Completion Technology 149 x x
SPD Products 150 x x x
ACCESSORIES
111
Baker Oil Tools CASING CLEANUP SYSTEMS
CASING SCRAPER
The Casing Scraper is used to remove
mud or cement sheath, imbedded bul-
lets, perforation burrs, rust, mill scale,
paraffin and similar substances from
the inside walls of the casing.
Use of a Casing Scraper is strongly
recommended before running and set-
ting production packers in all well con-
ditions.
FEATURES/BENEFITS
• Carburized scraping edges on the
blades provide endurance and maxi-
mum service
• Cleaning can be accomplished by
either rotation or reciprocation as a
result of blade arrangement in the
body that gives full 360° contact with
the casing ID
• Each blade is cut with left-hand heli-
cal grooves to allow the tool to
scrape down inside the casing
• Blades are held securely by blade
keepers which in turn are also held
by keepers for double protection
downhole
MODEL H™ WIRELINE
FEELER AND JUNK
CATCHER
DESCRIPTION
This tool is run into the well on electric
line prior to running the packer to as-
sure that the well bore is large enough
to permit subsequent passage of the
packer. The tool also serves to clean
the well of debris that might foul the
packer and cause premature setting. It
is also suggested that a casing scrap-
er run be made before setting a pack-
er in all well conditions.
Casing Scraper Model H Wireline

Product Family No. H16105 Feeler and Junk Catcher
112
PACKER SETTING SYSTEMS Baker Oil Tools
ELECTRIC WIRELINE MODEL L™ HI-TEMP

SETTING TOOLS WIRELINE PRESSURE
MODEL E-4™ WIRELINE SETTING ASSEMBLY
PRESSURE SETTING
ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION/
APPLICATION
The Hi-Temp Setting Tool is designed Product Family
DESCRIPTION/ to perform the same function as the No. H43702
Model E-4 Wireline
APPLICATION Model E-4 Wireline Pressure Setting Pressure Setting
Assembly
The venerable Model E-4 Wireline Assembly in wells which are greater For setting Baker
Pressure Setting Assembly is the in- than 400°F (204°C). To accommodate Models D, DA, F,
FA, F-1, FA-1, HE
dustry standard for wireline setting all packers made for high tempera- or HEA Retainer
equipment. This tool is used to set tures, this setting tool can apply up to Production Packers
and Models Re-
Wireline Set Packers. The Model E-4 90,000 lbs force. The primary power trieva-D, “Retrieva-
DA Lock-Set and
is also used to set many gravel pack source for the Model L is hydrostatic SC-2P Retrievable
packers and bridge plugs. (See Baker pressure acting against an atmo- Seal Bore Packers.
Oil Tools' Gravel Pack and Remedial spheric pressure chamber. The tool is
and Stimulation Catalogs for details.) made in two versions, a two stage and
a three stage. The three stage version
In all applications where a Model E-4 is for applications where there is not
is used, a Model B or other appropri- enough hydrostatic pressure to oper-
ate Wireline Adapter Kit will be re- ate the two stage tool. An igniter and a
quired. Also required are the small power charge are used to shear
equipment and skilled services of a li- off the end of a plug and open a port
censed wireline perforating and/or to the well fluid which provides the
logging service company. controlled force to set the packer and
The proper size wireline adapter kit is part the release stud. It also has a me-
installed in the packer. The packer tering device which can control the
Product Family
and adapter kit are then connected to setting time from almost instanta- No. H43809
the pressure setting assembly. These neous to over one hour. The igniter Model B Wireline
Adapter Kit
are run to setting depth on the electric and charge are rated to operate to a Used with Models
wireline. maximum temperature of 600°F E-4 and L Wireline
Pressure Setting
A small charge of electrical current, (315°C). Assembly and
Model J Hydraulic
transmitted through the electric wire- The same Model B Wireline Adapter Setting Assemblies.
line, ignites the power charge in the Kits used with the Model E-4 are used
setting assembly, gradually building with the Model L Pressure Setting As-
up gas pressure. This pressure pro- sembly. The OD of the Model L is
vides the controlled force necessary 3.625" (92.1 mm) and it can be used
to set the packer. When the pre- to run and set packers in 4-1/2"
ACCESSORIES
scribed setting force has been applied (114.3 mm) OD and larger casing.
to the packer, the release stud in the
wireline adapter kit parts, thus freeing
the setting equipment from the pack-
er, allowing it to be retrieved. The
proper release stud is shipped with Product Family
No. H43712
each packer at export. The Model E-4 Model L Hi-Temp
Wireline Pressure Setting Assembly is Wireline Pressure
Setting Assembly
recommended for use at tempera- For setting Baker
tures below 400°F (204°C). Models D, DA, F, FA,
F-1, FA-1, HE or HEA
Retainer Production
Use of the Baker Slow-Set Power Packers and Models
Charge, Product Family No. H43766, Retrieva-D,
Retrieva-DA Lock-
is recommended when setting perma- Set and SC-2P
nent or retrievable packers using #10 Retrievable Seal
Bore Packers.
or #20 size Model E-4 Wireline Pres-
sure Setting Assemblies.
113
Baker Oil Tools PACKER SETTING SYSTEMS
MODEL J™ AND B-2™

HYDRAULIC SETTING
TOOL
and H41574
Baker Models D and DA, F-1, FA-1,
HE and HEA, Retrieva-D, Retrieva-
DA, and SC-2P and their respective B
versions (DB, DAB, etc.,) can be set
on tubing or drillpipe using a Model B
Wireline Adapter Kit (shown on previ-
ous page) and a Model J Hydraulic
Setting Assembly. These setting as-
semblies are particularly useful for
setting permanent packers in high-an-
gle, deviated wells such as those
drilled offshore.
The packer is run to setting depth on
the tubing string and a ball is dropped
to the ball seat in the setting tool. Suf-
ficient tubing pressure is then applied
to set and pack off the packer. The
pressure, or combined pressure and
tubing tension, then parts the release
stud in the adapter kit and frees the
setting assembly from the packer for
retrieval.
Packers in sizes 23 and larger can
also be set using the Model B-2 Set-
ting Tool. This setting tool is designed
to withstand high tensile loads and
may be run with high temperature
seals rated at 550°F (288°C). After the
packer is run to setting depth, a trip-
ping ball is dropped to seat in the set-
ting tool. A combination of pressure
and tension may be used to set the
packer. After reaching a pre-deter-
mined setting pressure, the ball set
shifts causing a pressure drop and an
indication that setting is complete. Pri-
or to disengaging the setting tool from
the packer, the annulus may be pres-
surized to confirm a successful setting
of the packer. Right-hand rotation dis-
Model J Hydraulic Setting Assembly Model B-2 Hydraulic Setting Tool engages the setting tool from the
Product Family No. H41371 Product Family No. H41574 packer.
Used in conjunction with Model B-2 Hydraulic
Set Adapter Kit, Product Family No. H41575
114
PACKER SETTING SYSTEMS Baker Oil Tools
MODEL BH™ AND BHH™

SETTING TOOL
and H41577
Baker Models BH and BHH Setting
Tools are designed to enable the set-
ting of Baker Model D, DA, F and FA
type packers on drillpipe. Both Setting
Tools can develop a force of up to
126,000 lbs with stroke up to 10".
The BH and BHH Setting Tools are at-
tached directly to the packer by the
setting nut (of the BH) and latch (of the
BHH), which screw into the left-hand
thread at the top of the packer. Tool is
actuated by differential tubing or drill-
pipe pressure at the setting tool.
Both setting tools can be rotationally
released. While the BH Setting Tool
consists of a solid setting nut, the mod-
ified setting latch mechanism of the
BHH allows for three distinct methods
of release as listed in Features/Bene-
fits.
FEATURES/BENEFITS
• Drillpipe connection supplied as
standard
• Tool is fitted with tubular extension
for gripping in tongs, slips and eleva-
tors
• 10" stroke ensures setting of slips on
a complete range of products
• Pressure testing can be carried out
through the drillpipe before releasing
ACCESSORIES
Model BH Setting Tool
from the packer Product Family No. H41576
• Tensile load capacity 150,00 lbs
• Pressure rating 10,000 psi in burst
and collapse
• Special shear feature prevents the
setting nut (of the BH) and latch (of
the BHH) from being made up too
tightly
Model BHH Setting Tool
115
Baker Oil Tools PACKER RETRIEVING SYSTEMS
MODEL S-1™ MODEL RETRIEVA-D™

RETRIEVING TOOL RETRIEVING TOOL
DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
The Model S-1 Retrieving Tool is The Model Retrieva-D Retrieving
used to retrieve SC Series, HP Tool is used to retrieve Retrieva-
Series, and Model A Retrieva-D D, Retrieva-DA and Model A Re-
Series Packers. trieva-D Packers.
The S-1 Retrieving Tool can be The Retrieva-D Retrieving Tool is
used with jars. The top sub has a differentiated from the Model S-1
tool joint connection for greater Retrieving Tool by the use of a
strength. Flat surfaces on the an- shear release catch sleeve.
chor mandrel and crossover sub Shearing out the catch sleeve ac-
provide superior jarring surfaces. tivates a built in 10" jar to facilitate
The mandrel is keyed to the an- packer removal.
chor mandrel, allowing rotation in
The tubing should not be allowed
any position. All internal threads
to rotate to the right during retriev-
are Acme threads for strength,
al as this would tend to disengage
and the entire tool is manufac-
the anchor sub from the packer on
tured from heat-treated steel. This
both S-1 and Retrieva-D style re-
tool is recommended for the most
trieving tools.
rugged conditions and can be run
with drill collars and jars.
For proper retrieving operation,
the S-1 Retrieving Tool must pass
through and extend below the
packer. When running accessory
equipment on the packer, the ID
immediately below the packer
must be able to accept the retriev-
ing tool.
Model S-1 Model Retrieva-D

Retrieving Tool Retrieving Tool
Product Family No. Product Family No.
H48853 H64617
116
PACKER RETRIEVING SYSTEMS Baker Oil Tools
POWER TOOL drop has been observed. This will indi-

cate the cut has been made. Once the
PREMIER™ mandrel is cut, upward movement of the
WORKSTRING workstring will release and stretch out
the slips and packing element system.
RETRIEVING TOOL The packer and any tailpipe can be
Product Family No. H78464 pulled out of the well.
In stacked packer applications, addi-
DESCRIPTION tional cuts will be required to sever all
A Premier™ Packer, Product Family the packer mandrels before the packers
No. H78463, can be removed either on can be retrieved.
the production string using thru-tubing
cutting methods, or on the workstring FEATURES/BENEFITS:
using the POWER Tool. • Field-Proven - Uses field proven com-
To use the Premier Workstring Retriev- ponents from the Model S-1™
ing (POWER) Tool, the anchor type Retrieving Tool, Product Family No.
seal assembly must be removed from H48853, and the Model DB™ Under-
the upper sealbore of the packer. A reamer, Product Family No. H15097
POWER Tool is run in on an appropri- • Removal of packer and tailpipe - high
ately designed workover string consist- tensile strength throughout the
ing of jars, drill collars, or if rotation of retrieving tool enables removal of the
the pipe is not possible, a downhole mo- packer and long lengths of tailpipe
tor. below the packer
Upon reaching the upper sealbore re- • Configurable for use with Mud Motor -
ceptacle, the tool enters the packer in applications with upper extended
bore and is automatically positioned for length PBR, the POWER Tool can be
mechanical cutting. Apply sufficient set- adjusted with spacer subs and Mud
down weight to ensure that the anchor Motor to allow retrieval of the entire
latch positively engages the left-hand completion assembly
thread in the sealbore receptacle. Grad- • Emergency disengagement - clutch
ually bring the pump rate up to the flow mechanism allows disengagement of
rate and rotations per minute (RPM), POWER Tool with tension and right-
which was determined by the Baker Oil hand rotation
Tools' engineer on site. Continue the • Fit for application design - bearing
cutting process until a positive pressure below top sub allows underreamer to
rotate and cut packer mandrel
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Casing Packer POWER
Max Upper Min
OD Weight
Size OD Sealbore ID Size
ACCESSORIES
5-1/2 139.7 20 - 23 450-(36x)239 4.500 114.3 3.625 92.1 2.390 60.7 450-36x239
582-(47x)387 3.875 98.4
4.750 120.7 582/591/598-47x387/376
32 - 35 582-(47x)376 5.820 147.8 3.760 95.5
582-(36x)287 3.625 92.1 2.870 72.9 582/591/598-36x287
591-(47x)387 3.875 98.4
4.750 120.7 582/591/598-47x387/376
7 177.8 29 - 32 591-(47x)376 5.910 150.1 3.760 95.5
591-(36x)287 3.625 92.1 2.870 72.9 582/591/598-36x287
598-(47x)387 3.875 98.4
4.750 120.7 582/591/598-47x387/376
26 - 29 598-(47x)376 5.983 152.0 3.760 95.5
598-(36x)287 3.625 92.1 2.870 72.9 582/591/598-36x287
645-(47x)387 3.875 98.4
33.7 - 39 6.450 163.8 645-47x387/376
645-(47x)376 3.760 95.5
7-5/8 193.6 4.750 120.7
659-(47x)387 3.875 98.4
29.7-33.7 6.590 167.4 659-47x387/376
659-(47x)376 3.760 95.5
831-(60x)490 4.900 124.5 831/845-60x490
6.000 155.8
47 - 53.5 831-(60x)475 8.310 221.1 4.750 120.7 831/845-60x475
831-(47x)387 4.750 120.7 3.875 98.4 831/845-47x387
9-5/8 244.5
845-(60x)490 4.900 124.5 831/845-60x490 POWER Tool
6.000 155.8
40 - 47 845-(60x)475 8.450 214.6 4.750 120.7 831/845-60x475 Premier Workstring Retrieving Tool
845-(47x)387 4.750 120.7 3.875 98.4 831/845-47x387 Product Family No. H78464
Premier Packer must be equipped with upper sealbore for POWER Tool to latch into.

Baker Oil Tools SEAL ASSEMBLIES
DOWNHOLE SEALING SYSTEMS

Click Here for
A variety of downhole sealing accessories are available for connecting tubing with packers. Each is designed to meet
Additional
the specific requirements of certain completion techniques. To select the proper packer to tubing seal system for any
Information
well completion, careful consideration must be given to present and future well conditions. Factors which must be con-
sidered include:
• Seal movement
• Maximum pressure differential
• Maximum and minimum temperatures
• Well fluids (H2S, CO2, or other corrosives and inhibitors)
• Workover frequency
• Hole geometry
• Required internal diameter for flow rate and access downhole
• Tensile forces (packer to tubing)
• Actuation and release mechanisms
• Packer design
As well designs and completion techniques have advanced, so have the number and variation of specialized down-
hole sealing systems. The four main categories of downhole sealing systems are: Locators, Anchors, On-Off Tools,
and Extenda-Joints. Each category has variations to handle special circumstances. For information, specifications
and order information, contact your local Baker Oil Tools Representative.
LOCATOR TUBING SEAL ASSEMBLY

The Locator Tubing Seal Assembly is the most basic packer sealing system for packers incorporating a sealing bore.
It is run in the well on the production tubing string until its no-go shoulder “locates” on the top of the packer. This po-
sitions one or more seal stacks in the packer's sealbore and establishes a seal between the packer and tubing.
When a Locator Tubing Seal Assembly is landed in a packer, the tubing is normally set in compression to compensate
for any contraction of the tubing during treating operations. However, it is not always possible or desirable to slack off
sufficient weight, particularly in deep deviated wells. In such a case, additional length must be added to the packer's
sealbore using Sealbore Extensions and to the Locator Tubing Seal Assembly using a combination of spacer tubes
and additional seal units.
MODEL K™, N™ MODEL G™ LOCATOR

LOCATOR TUBING SEAL TUBING SEAL
NIPPLE ASSEMBLY
Used for sealing the upper bore of al- Basic assembly includes two seal
ternate bore seal bore packers. One stacks. Any number of seal units or
seal stack is used on this seal nipple spacer tubes can be added for in-
so no upward movement can be tol- creased length. Designed for use in
erated, therefore, sufficient set-down single bore seal bore packers. Al-
weight must be available to prevent though not commonly used in this
movement, Supplied with blank or way, they are also compatible with
half mule shoe bottom sub which will the lower seal bore in most sizes of
not accommodate tail pipe or pro- alternate bore seal bore packers.
duction tubes. Production tubes, tailpipe or other
accessories with OD's compatible
with packer bore can be attached to
the bottom of this seal assembly.
118
SEAL ASSEMBLIES Baker Oil Tools
MODEL G™ LOCATOR
TUBING SEAL ASSEMBLY
WITH SPACER TUBE
Click Here for
Additional This extended Model G Locator Tubing
Information Seal Assembly is furnished with 6 seal
stacks. Designed for installations re-
quiring tubing movement, this seal as-
sembly should only be used with
packers with seal bore extensions or
with retrievable packer bore recepta-
cles. Like all locator tubing seal as-
semblies, it should be landed with
sufficient set-down weight to prevent
seal movement. When used in a prop-
erly designed system, this seal assem-
bly will give long service life even if
movement occurs.
MODEL L™, LE™, AND

LM™ LOCATOR TUBING
SEAL ASSEMBLY WITH
SPACER TUBE
Similar to the G Locator Tubing Seal
Assembly with spacer tube but de-
signed for use in extremely hostile en-
vironments in Models D, F-1, HE,
SB-3 and SC-2P Seal Bore Packers.
Normally furnished with 3 seal stacks
and 3 debris barriers. The L features
metal-to-metal internal connections
and is used with premium seal stacks.
The LM also features a compression
energized metal-to-metal packer to
tubing seal.
ACCESSORIES
Model G Locator Tubing Seal Assembly Model L Locator Tubing Seal Assembly
with Spacer Tube with Spacer Tube
119
Click Here for
ANCHOR TUBING SEAL ASSEMBLY Additional
Information
The Anchor Tubing Seal Assembly is used as an alternative to set-down weight to prevent seal movement or
when it is desirable to land the tubing in tension. The Anchor Tubing Seal Assembly or Anchor Tubing Seal Nip-
ple is run in on the production string. Set-down weight will cause the anchor's threaded latch to engage the cor-
responding threads in the top of the packer. Once engaged, the anchor and tubing are securely locked in place.
Any tubing contraction will cause a tensile load to be applied to the tubing string. Care must be taken to ensure
tensile forces developed will not part the tubing whenever an anchor is used. To release the anchor it must be
rotated to the right 10 to 12 turns at the packer.
Many variations to the Anchor Tubing Seal Assembly exist to fulfill special requirements, for instance: Snap-
Latch (page 121), Latch-In Shear Release (page 121), Snap-In/Snap-Out Set Down Activated Shear Release
(page 122), Annular Pressure Release (not shown), and Tubing Pressure Release (not shown), Solid Nut (not
shown), and Punch Release (page 121). For further information about Anchor Tubing Assemblies in special ap-
plications, contact your Baker Oil Tools Representative.
MODEL E™ AND EC™ MODEL M™ ANCHOR

ANCHOR TUBING SEAL TUBING SEAL
ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
Basic assembly includes two seal Similar to the E Anchor Tubing Seal
stacks. Designed for use in seal bore Assembly. Standard assembly fur-
packers. Production tubes, tailpipe or nished with 2 seal stacks. The M fea-
other accessories with OD’s compati- tures metal-to-metal internal connec-
ble with packer bore can be attached tions and is used with premium seal
to the bottom of this seal assembly. stacks.
The EC features metal-to-metal inter-
nal connections for hostile environ-
ments.
MODEL K™, KC™, MODEL N™ AND NM™

KC-1™, AND KC-2™ ANCHOR TUBING SEAL
ANCHOR TUBING SEAL ASSEMBLY
NIPPLES Similar to the K Anchor Tubing Seal
Nipple but designed for use in ex-
Used for sealing in the upper bore of
tremely hostile environments in the
alternate bore seal bore packers. It
alternate bore of selected alternate
is supplied with one seal stack and
bore seal bore packers. The NM fea-
blank or half mule shoe bottom sub
tures metal-to-metal internal connec-
which will not accommodate tailpipe tions and premium seal stacks. The
or production tubes. The KC, KC-1, NM also features a compression en-
and KC-2 Anchors feature metal-to- ergized metal-to metal packer to tub-
metal internal connections for hos- ing seal.
tile environments.
The KC-2 Anchor Tubing Seal As-
sembly is for use exclusively with
the SABL-4 Packer in the “North
Sea Standard” completion.
120
Click Here for

MODEL E™ MODEL E™, K™, AND
Additional SNAP-LATCH SEAL N™ LATCH-IN SHEAR
Information
ASSEMBLY RELEASE ANCHOR
Snap-Latch Seal Assemblies are TUBING SEAL
similar to shear release anchor seal ASSEMBLY
assemblies because they are
latched in place with set-down A Latch-In Shear Release Anchor
weight and released with tension. Tubing Seal Assembly may be
However, unlike shear release an- used for those installations where
chors, snap-latch seal assemblies anchored seal assemblies are de-
may be snapped into and out of a sirable but where the tubing cannot
packer many times. Initially, 8,000 be rotated to release the anchor.
to 12,000 lbs tension is required to Set-down weight is used to latch the
remove the snap-latch from the shear release anchor into the pack-
packer’s bore. Snap-latch seal as- er and tension is used to release it.
semblies are used in those installa-
tions where a mechanical snap-in,
snap-out indication is required to
verify the seal assembly is properly
positioned in the packer’s bore.
Typical applications include sump
packers in gravel packs and lower
packers in tandem completions
which cannot be pressure tested.
HYDRAULIC PUNCH RELEASABLE ANCHOR

The Baker Hydraulic Punch Releasable Anchor is a unique anchor and PBR assembly de-
signed specifically for applications where rotation for release is not available, such as deep-
water wells. Release of the anchor is performed with a punch tool, originally developed for use
in safety valves, which opens a shifting port. Pressure applied in favor of the tubing positively
releases the anchor for retrieval.
ACCESSORIES
FEATURES/BENEFITS
• Single-trip completion
• Permits removal of tubing string without rotation or chemical cut - adding workover flexibility
to deep wells or applications with high alloy tubing
• Metal-to-Metal nose seal available
• Proven Baker Punch Communication Tool technology for activating release mechanism
• PBR is retrievable with the packer via drillpipe workstring and retrieving tool
• Packer-Anchor assembly can be internally pressure tested in the field
• Low applied tubing pressure actuates releasing mechanism, and tensile load shear
releases the Anchor assembly from the PBR
• Control line cutter mechanism available for feedthrough applications

MODEL SNAP-IN/ FEATURES/BENEFITS

• Snap-in/snap-out facility at the packer
Click Here for SNAP-OUT, SET DOWN to allow the operator to accurately
Additional ACTIVATED, SHEAR land the tubing string at surface
Information • A pre-determined set down load to
RELEASE ANCHOR activate anchor to full tensile carrying
Product Family No. H44387 capacity
• The set-down sleeve protects the
upper seal bore of the packer from
The Snap-in/Snap-out, Set Down Acti- debris intrusion
vated, Shear Release Anchor is an an- • Emergency release facility by means
choring and sealing device which of right-hand torque and an overpull
connects the retrievable tubing string to at surface will disconnect the anchor
the upper seal bore and thread of an al- from the packer
ternate bore permanent packer. Alter- • The Baker Left-hand square threads
natively the anchor can be connected to on the latch are Bakertroned to
a retrievable packer that incorporates reduce the opportunity for galling of
the profile of a permanent packer. mating threads in high chromium
Prior to committing to full engagement applications
of the anchor, the snap-in/snap-out fa-
cility allows accurate positioning or CAUTION:
space out of the tubing string at surface The Snap-In/Snap-Out Set Down
in relation to a tubing hanger. Activated Shear Release Anchor
As long as the pre-determined set down requires an extended upper seal
is not exceeded, the tool will continue to bore from the standard packer bore.
have the ability to snap-in and snap-out Contact your local Baker Oil Tools
of the packer body without committing Representative to confirm anchor/
to its’ fully locked-in tensile carrying packer compatibility.
Baker Model Snap-In/Snap-Out, Set Down condition.
Activated, Shear Release Anchor
SEAL UNITS MODEL E™

Seal Units are used to add TUBING SEAL
additional seal stacks to NIPPLE
Model G or L Locator Tub-
ing Seal Assemblies and A Tubing Seal Nipple is
Model E Tubing Seal Nip- used to seal in the lower
ples. Any number can be packer completions where
used to accommodate ex- two or more permanent
pected tubing movement. packers have the same
seal bore diameter. They
should be run with addition-
al seal units to simplify
spacing-out and to accom-
modate tubing movement.
Production tubes, tailpipe
or other accessories with
OD’s compatible with pack-
er bore can be run below.
122
Click Here for RATCHETING MULESHOE

Additional Product Family No. H44457
Information
The new Baker Ratcheting Muleshoe offers a simple and reliable alternative for
landing seal assemblies in sealbore packers in situations where tubing rotation is
either impossible or undesirable. The Ratcheting Muleshoe indexes automatically
one-eighth of a turn each time the top of the packer is tagged, or until the half mule-
shoe bottom positions itself properly to enter the packer bore. The muleshoe fea-
tures a short, compact design and rugged construction. It is indispensable for
spacing out and landing seals in the lower seal bore packer of a dual string hookup
where tubing rotation is impractical. It is especially suitable when tubing mounted
safety valves are being run to avoid damage to the control lines.
Ratcheting Muleshoe
Product Family No.
H44457
THREADED BLANK AND HALF MULE

PIN DOWN CHAMFERED SHOE
BOTTOM SUB BOTTOM SUB BOTTOM SUB
Used to accommo- Used where tailpipe, This bottom sub facil-
date tail pipe, a pro- production tube or itates guiding the
duction tube or other other accessory is seal assembly or nip-
accessory below the not required below ple into the packer
tubing seal assem- the tubing seal as- bore and is recom-
ACCESSORIES
bly. Available to fit sembly. These subs mended in most in-
the Model G or L Lo- are available for all stances. Available for
cator Tubing Seal seal assemblies and all locator or anchor
Assembly, Model E seal nipples. tubing seal assem-
or M Anchor Seal As- blies and Model E
sembly or Model E Seal Nipples.
Tubing Seal Nipple.
NOTE: These bottom subs are not ordered separately. They should be specified when ordering seal assemblies
or seal nipples. If not specified for a Model K, or N Seal Nipple, a blank and chamfered bottom sub will be sup-
plied.
123
SEAL STACKS R-RYTE Seal Stack - Made up of

PS006 chevron seals with Teflon
Standard Seal Stack - Made up and Ryton back-up rings, Ryton
of nitrile chevron seals and steel front-up rings and steel separa-
Spacer spacer rings. Should not be al- tors. Should not be allowed to
lowed to leave seal bore in ser- leave seal bore in service.
Chevron Seal
vice.
Seal-RYTE Seal Stack - Made up
Bonded Seal Stack - Two nitrile of Perfluoroelastomer chevron
or Viton seals are bonded to each seals with Teflon and Ryton back-
metal insert. These inserts are up rings, Ryton front-up rings and
separated by steel spacers. Bond- steel separators. Should not be al-
STANDARD
SEAL STACK ed seals should be used when lowed to leave seal bore in ser-
seals cannot be prevented from vice.
moving out of the seal bore while
Bonded Seal holding differential pressure. Also K-RYTE and K-HEET Seal
Ring
recommended for sealing low Stacks - Made up of KALREZ
pressure gas at low temperatures. brand Perfluoroelastomer chevron
seals with Teflon and Ryton or
V-RYTE Seal Stack - Made up of HEET back-up rings, Ryton or
O-Ring
Viton chevron seals with Teflon HEET front-up rings and steel
Spacer and Ryton™ back-up rings, Ryton separators. Should not be allowed
front-up rings and steel separa- to leave seal bore in service.
tors. Should not be allowed to
leave seal bore in service. Debris Barrier Stack - Made up
BONDED of Teflon and Ryton back-up rings
SEAL STACK A-RYTE Seal Stack - Made up of and Ryton front-up rings and steel
Aflas chevron seals with Teflon separators. Used as a wiper to
and Ryton back-up rings, Ryton prevent debris from damaging K-
Back-Up Ring front-up rings and steel separa- RYTE, K-HEET, A-HEET or Seal-
tors. Should not be allowed to RYTE seal stacks when seals are
Back-Up Ring leave seal bore in service. moved after being placed in ser-
A-HEET Seal Stacks - Made up vice.
Chevron Seal
Front-Up Ring
of Aflas chevron seals with Teflon
and HEET back-up rings, HEET
front-up rings and steel separa- Click Here for
Spacer tors. Should not be allowed to Additional
leave seal bore in service. Information
_ - RYTE™
_ - HEET™
SEAL STACK
Spacer
Wiper Ring
Wiper Ring
DEBRIS
BARRIER STACK
124
RETRIEVABLE PACKER seals until sufficient tension oc-

Click Here for curs to shear the engaged shear
Additional
BORE RECEPTACLE ring. At this time, the seal assem-
Information Product Family No. H68319 bly is free to move to accommo-
Graphics on following page date tubing movement to reduce
resultant tubing loads. After the
DESCRIPTION/ event which caused the tubing
APPLICATION movement to occur is complete,
Baker's Retrievable PBR Systems the seal assembly engages the
are installed in wells as part of the next shear ring when it moves
completion to accommodate ex- down. Again, the seal assembly is
pansion and contraction of pro- now static until a future event oc-
duction tubing while maintaining curs which would shear the en-
pressure integrity. gaged shear ring. To retrieve the
PBR system, the seal assembly is
The retrievable PBR is run as an simply pulled out of the PBR; and,
integral part of the production tub- then the PBR is retrieved with a Retrievable PBR Retrieving Tool
ing above the completion packer PBR retrieving tool. Product Family No. H68396
or casing receptacle. The most
common completion method is to FEATURES/BENEFITS
run the PBR as pictured with the • Accommodates expansion and SPECIFICATION GUIDE
seal assembly fully inserted into contraction of tubing
Tubing
the receptacle. After reaching the • Seals can be removed and
Size Tool Size
desired depth, sufficient tension is replaced without unsetting
in. mm
applied to shear the screws or packer
2-3/8 60.3 40-26
shear ring. The well can then be • Largest possible ID through
20-30
spaced out as desired. completion
2-7/8 73.0 20-32
• Seals fully protected during run-
An option to this standard proce- 80-32
in
dure is utilization of the Tubing 3-1/2 88.9 80-40
• Seal unit configuration reduces
Stability Latch (TSL) as the re- 80-47
risk of hydrostatic lock 4-1/2 114.3
leasing mechanism for the seal 80-48
• Available in custom lengths
assembly. As pictured, the TSL 190-60
5-1/2 139.7
features three or more shear rings 192-60
with shear values that may vary 6-5/8 168.2 190-71
dependent on well design. De- 7 177.8 190-73
signing a completion using the
TSL allows the completion design-
er the ability to maintain static
ACCESSORIES

Click Here for Optional shear screw release allows shear

Additional valves to be field adjustable.
Information
Standard Z-shape shear ring retains spent shear

ring parts to reduce potential problems.
TSL
Debris The primary function of the Tubing Stability
Barrier Latch (TSL) is to keep the seals in the PBR
static during all well conditions except
extreme treating, killing, or stimulation
operations. It also reduces the compressive
load required to immobilize the tubing string
when compared to a floating seal locator
based completion design.
Debris
Barrier
Holds Directionally oriented seal units are de-

signed to hold pressure from one direction
differential
only. They are preserved in PBR applica-
pressure tions to reduce the chance of trapping an
from below area of atmospheric pressure between the
functional seal stacks.
Contact your local Baker Oil Tools Repre-
sentative for function discussion on seal ori-
Holds entation.
differential
pressure
from above
Debris
Barrier Non-sealing debris barriers serve two important
functions: they keep well solids or trash from setting
in the annular area between the honed bore and
seal assembly which may impede the movement of
the seal assembly. They also clean the sealing area
before functional working seals contact the seal
bore.
“Retrievable PBR” with Seal Assembly (may be pre-spaced

for upward and downward movement)
126
SEAL EXPANSION / DISCONNECT DEVICES Baker Oil Tools
Click Here for MODEL A™, AH™, FEATURES/BENEFITS

Additional
A-1™, AND AH-1™ • Metal-to-metal connections in
Information housing and slick joint eliminates
EXTENDA-JOINT™ O-ring seals
Product Family Nos. H68357, • Optional seating nipple profile in
H68358, H68354, and H68353 upper end of slick joint
• Up-shear ring secures slick joint
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION to housing for running in. Stan-
The Model A Extenda-Joint is a dard stroke lengths 10 ft (3.05 m),
high performance tubing expansion 15 ft (4.57 m), 20 ft (6.10 m) and
joint used when tubing movement 25 ft (7.62 m)
is expected because of tempera- • Built in capability for testing to full
ture and/or pressure changes dur- working pressure in assembled
ing treatment and anchor seal condition
assembly. To provide very accu- • One piece seal housing accom-
rate release forces, the slick joint modates both set of working
and the outer housing are locked seals for extra strength, ease of
together during run in by a shear redressing and lessening
ring instead of shear screws. chances of frozen seals. V-Ryte,
A-Ryte, K-Ryte or standard nitrile
The Model AH Extenda-Joint is chevron seals are available.
identical to the Model A but con- Debris barriers located above
tains an annulus pressure operated and below working seal to protect
release mechanism in place of the seals
shear ring normally used to secure • Suitable for H2S service per
the slick joint to the housing. The NACE Standard MR-01-75
AH can be ordered pre-spaced to
allow both upward and downward AH-1 FEATURES/BENEFITS
movement after release. This • No effect on release pressure
makes it ideally suited for one-trip when tension or compression is
completions using hydraulic-set applied to the tool
packers as it can be released with- • Adjustable annulus pressure
out tubing movement after flanging release (1,000 psi (68.9 bar) min)
up. Release values for either tool • Emergency shear release
are easily adjusted by changing • Slick joint can be released after
shear rings. the well has been flanged up
The Model A-1 and AH-1 Extenda- • Existing Model A-1 Extenda-
Joint tools offer the same features Joints can be converted into
and benefits as the A and AH Ex- AH-1 Extenda-Joints
ACCESSORIES
tenda-Joints at a lower cost, and
with fewer connections and result-
ing leak paths.
The Model AH-1 is also available
with an optional reduced friction re-
lease mechanism, eliminating the
effect of tension on release pres-
sure. The Model AH Extenda-Joint
can be converted into a Model
AH-1.
Model A Model AH-1

Extenda-Joint Extenda-Joint
Product Family No. Product Family No.
H68357 H68353
127
Baker Oil Tools SEAL EXPANSION / DISCONNECT DEVICES
A AND AH EXTENDA-JOINT, PRODUCT FAMILY NOS. H68357 AND H68358

SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Slick
Tubing Max
Tool Joint Max BFC
Size OD
Size # OD ID " Profile &
2-3/8 60.3 26–(3.80x–) 3.803 96.6 2.688 68.3 1.939 49.3 1.87
2-7/8 73.0 33–(5.13x–) 5.126 130.2 3.315 84.2 2.371 60.2 2.31
2.81 F & R
36–(4.80x–)! 4.803! 122.0
2.75 Sur-set
3-1/2 88.9 3.625 92.1 2.902 75.7
2.81 F & R
36–(5.40x–) 5.400 137.12
2.75 Sur-set
4 101.6 43–(5.90x–) 4.275 108.6 3.476 88.3 3.31
5.900 149.9 3.81 F & R
45–(5.90x–) 4.550 115.6 4.000 101.6
3.43 Sur-set
4-1/2 114.3
48–(7.03x–) 4.875 123.8
7.026 178.5 3.958 100.5 3.81
49–(7.03x–) 4.925 125.1
5-1/2 139.7 55–(7.66x–) 7.656 194.5 5.500 139.7 4.788 121.6 4.56
! Special clearance version.
# The basic tool size is indicated by four digits. When ordering, show stroke length of the slick joint in place of the blank spaces.
Example: 33–(5.13x–) with 20 ft stroke will read: 3320 (5.13x–). The blank space in the parenthesis is used to designate the
bore of the BFC profile. Use the first two digits of the profile. Example: 3320 (5.12x23) has a 2.31 bore. Specify the profile type
required i.e., F, R, AF, AR, etc.,
" Maximum slick joint ID without seating nipple profile.
& Maximum BFC seating nipple profile size, consistent with rated pressure for tool. Smaller BFC profiles may be furnished upon
request.
Contact your local Baker Oil Tools Representative for additional information concerning test pressures.
A-1 AND AH-1 EXTENDA-JOINT, PRODUCT FAMILY NOS. H65354 AND H68353
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Slick
Tubing Max
Tool Joint Max BFC
Size OD
Size OD ID Profile
3.395! 86.2
4-1/2 114.3 45 5.900 149.9 4.550 115.6 3.43
3.476 88.3
5-1/2 139.7 54 and 55 # 8.25 209.6 5.500 139.7 4.670 118.9 4.56
! ID with nipple profile (this may also reduce pressure rating).
# A-1 Extenda-Joint available in size 54 only.
128
DISCONNECT DEVICES Baker Oil Tools
MODEL L-10™ AND L-316™ FEATURES/BENEFITS

ON-OFF SEALING CONNECTOR • Superior sealing system
FAMILY • Available with bonded or non-elasto-
meric seals
• Orientation of seals eliminated need for
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION O-rings
The L-10 On-Off Sealing Connector provides the ability • Fit for environment
to simply and reliably retrieve the production string • Metallurgies - Standard Service or
without disturbing the companion packer below. Its’ NACE service
sealing system allows disconnecting of the tubing for • Elastomers - Nitrile, or thermoplastic
fluid circulation, while still assuring the seal integrity non-elastomeric
when reconnected. A seating nipple profile is available • Rated to 10,000 psi @ 275°F (135°C)
in the top of the seal nipple to permit plugging of the with bonded seals and 12,000 psi @
lower zone while the tubing is removed. In addition to the 350°F (135°C) with non-
left-hand releasing L-10 version, a right-hand releasing elastomeric seals
R-10 version is also available allowing remedial or • Lab tested - fully tested in gas at maxi-
stimulation work above the packer. The plug can then be mum temperature with multiple pres-
removed with conventional wireline methods, allowing sure reversals
the well to be returned to production. • Tensile rating compatible with L-80 tub-
ing in NACE trim
• Tensile rating compatible with P-105
The Model L-316 carries all of the design features built tubing in standard material
into the Model L-10, but it designed specifically for CO2 • Only top sub and seal nipple are
and waterflood applications. It uses 316 Stainless Steel exposed to flow
flow path material while maximizing load capacity. The • No welded parts Model L-10 On-Off
tubing pressure rating of 4,500 psi is available with ei- • Can be set to shear up or down Sealing Connector
ther bonded (40°F - 275°F) (4°C - 135°C) or non-elasto- • Automatic re-engagement with set- Product Family
meric (40°F - 325°F) (4°C - 163°C) seals. down weight
No. H68420
MODEL B™ AND D™ TWO WAY DOWNHOLE SHUT-OFF VALVE

The Models B and D Two Way Downhole Shut-Off Valves are mechanically actuated ball valves. It al-
lows well shut-in at packer depth when closed. It is commonly applied in CO2 flood and waterflood ap-
plication in combination with the Model L-316 On-Off Connector and Model A-3 or AL-2 Lok-Set Packer.
One-half turn of left-hand rotation closes the valve, prior to the tubing’s disconnection at the on-off Con-
nector. The valve is opened again with re-engagement of the tubing string and one-half right-hand ro-
tation at the tool.
ACCESSORIES
FEATURES/BENEFITS
• All parts are corrosion resistant materials
• Rated for CO2 service
• Holds pressure from above, as well as below, permitting tubing testing
• Tubing can be left in tension, neutral, or compression
• Smooth bore reduces pressure drops and turbulence
Model B Two-Way
Downhole
Shut-Off Valve
Product Family
No. H68410
129
Baker Oil Tools DISCONNECT DEVICES
L-10, R-10, L-316, R-316, LE-10, RE-10, AND BE-10 ON-OFF SEALING CONNECTORS
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Recommended
Tool Min Seal Washover
Casing Ranges
Size Nipple ID Shoe OD (Max)
OD Weight
in. mm in. (mm) in. mm in. mm lb/ft
4-1/2 114.3 9.5-13.5
3.750 95.3 5 127.0 11.5-24.1
5-1/2 139.7 20-23
5-1/2 139.7 13-23
4.500 114.3 6-5/8 168.3 20-32
7 177.8 23-38
6-5/8 168.3 20-32
1.87 (47.5) w/ Profile
2-3/8 60.3 7 177.8 17-38
1.930 (49.0) w/ Blank ID 5.500 139.7
7-5/8 193.7 24-47.1
8-5/8 219.1 24-49
7 177.8 17-20
7-5/8 193.7 24-45.3
6.250 158.8
8-5/8 219.1 24-49
9-5/8 244.5 32.3-53.5
8.125 206.4 9-5/8 244.5 32.3-53.5
5-1/2 139.7 13-23
4.500 114.3
6-5/8 168.3 20-32
7 177.8 17-38
5.500 139.7 7-5/8 193.7 24-47.1
8-5/8 219.1 44-49
2.31 (58.7) w/ Profile
2-7/8 73.0 7 177.8 17-20
2.377 (60.4) w/ Blank ID
7-5/8 193.7 24-45.3
6.250 158.8
8-5/8 219.1 24-49
9-5/8 244.5 32.3-53.5
9-5/8 244.5 32.3-53.5
8.125 206.4
6-5/8 168.3 20-32
7 177.8 17-38
5.500 139.7 7-5/8 193.7 24-47.1
6-5/8 168.3 20
7 177.8 17-32
2.81 (71.4) w/ Profile
3-1/2 88.9 5.888 149.6 7-5/8 193.7 24-47.1
2.942 (74.7) w/ Blank ID
8-5/8 219.1 32-49
8-5/8 219.1 24-49
7.250 184.2
9-5/8 244.5 32.3-53.5
8.125 206.4 9-5/8 244.5 32.3-53.5
MODEL B AND D TWO WAY DOWNHOLE SHUT-OFF VALVE

SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Max Overall
ID
Size OD Length
in. mm in. mm in. cm
2-3/8 1.820 46.2 3.850 97.8 19.625 49.9
2-7/8 2.375 60.3 4.438 112.7 17.625 44.8
130
EXPANSION JOINTS Baker Oil Tools
EXPANSION JOINT SELECTION GUIDE

LEEJ
L M N E LEEJ
Splined
Slimline Design x x
Click Here for
Pre-spaced with Model A Spacing Tool x
Additional
Pre-spaced with Shear Screws x x
Information
Full Opening ID x x x x x x
Swivel Capability/Clutched in Expanded Position x x x
Standard Stroke 16 20 10 9 10 10
Rotational Lock x x
MODEL N™ SPLINED MODEL E™ TUBING

EXPANSION JOINT EXPANSION JOINT
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION
The Baker Model N Splined Expansion The Baker Model E Expansion Joint is de-
Joint is designed for use in both single and signed for use above packers in well com-
multiple string completions to compensate pletions to compensate for tubing move-
for tubing movement. ment during treating and injections opera-
The tool provides 10 ft of movement, and tions.
utilizes rugged bonded seals for reliable The Model E contains standard chevron
continuous service. The telescoping action seals or bonded seals. Also, the Model E is
permits the tool to be used as a bumper a swivel joint until extended to the full
sub or jar when retrieving the installation. stroke when a clutch engages and allows
Shear screws may be installed to initially torque to be transmitted through the joint.
position the expansion joint in its extended, Tool commonly provides 9 ft of movement.
collapsed or mid-position.
A rotation lock lets the operator rotate
FEATURES/ BENEFITS
through the expansion joint in any position. • Rotational lock in extended position to
transmit torque when needed
FEATURES/BENEFITS • Extra long seal area to provide adequate
• Shear screws easily added or removed sealing in case of side load
to adjust shear value • Temperature rating up to 325°F (163°C)
• Tool can be locked in fully extended, fully
collapsed or mid-stroke position with
shear screws
• Full length keys provide transmission of Model E Tubing
ACCESSORIES
Model N Splined
Expansion Joint torque through full length of travel Expansion Joint
Product Family Product Family
• Metal goods suitable for H2S service per No. H44145
No. H44163
NACE Standard MR-01-75
MODEL N SPLINED EXPANSION JOINT MODEL E TUBING EXPANSION JOINT

Fully Fully
Tubing Max Min Extended Torque Tubing Max Min Stroke
Collapsed Collapsed
Size OD OD Length Rating Size OD OD Length
Length Length
in. in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm ft-lbs kg-m in. in. mm in. mm ft m in. mm
2-3/8 3.688 93.6 1.930 49.0 273 693.4 157 396.7 2,000 277 2-3/8 3.750 92.5 1.968 50.0
167.5 4255
2-7/8 4.531 115.0 2.441 62.0 283 718.8 162 411.4 2,500 346 2-7/8 4.500 114.3 3.690 93.7 9 2.74
3-1/2 4.906 124.6 2.875 73.0 276 701.0 156 396.2 3,500 484 3-1/2 5.000 127.0 3.880 98.6 150.7 3828
4-1/2 6.531 165.8 3.875 98.4 278 706.1 158 401.3 5,000 691 4-1/2 5.500 139.7 4.880 124.0 12 3.66 208.0 5283

Baker Oil Tools EXPANSION JOINTS
MODEL L™ EXPANSION JOINT

Click Here for MODEL A™ POSITIONING TOOL
Additional
Information
MODEL M™ EXPANSION JOINT
The Model L and M Expansion Joints are slim-
line tools designed primarily for use in dual
string completions. The Model L Expansion
Joint can be pre-spaced using the Model A
Positioning Tool to allow upward and down-
ward movement. Ideal for one-trip flanged up
dual completions where extreme tubing move-
ment is anticipated. Once the packer has been
set, the Model A Positioning Tool is retrieved
on wireline allowing the expansion joint to
stroke out. The Model M Expansion Joint does
not permit pre-spacing.
FEATURES/BENEFITS
• Full opening ID is compatible with tubing ID
• OD of tool compatible with dual string applica-
tions
• Standard stroke lengths up to 20 ft (Model M) and
16 ft (Model L), other lengths available upon
request
• Functions as a swivel until stroked out - available
with optional rotational clutch
• V-Ryte seals are standard, other sealing materi-
als are available upon request
• Suitable for H2S Service per NACE Standard Model M Expansion Joint
MR-01-75 Product Family No. H44162
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Max Min
Tubing
Tool OD Tool ID
Size
Model L Model M Model L ! Model M
in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
2-3/8 60.3 3.505 89.0 3.250 82.5 1.937 49.2 1.939 49.2
2-7/8 73.0 4.005 101.7 3.765 95.6 2.374 60.3 2.374 60.3
3-1/2 88.9 4.260 108.2 4.260 108.2 2.840 72.1 2.890 73.4
4-1/2 114.3 5.390 136.9 3.895 98.9
- - - -
5-1/2 139.7 7.070 179.5 4.830 122.6
! ID required to accommodate Model A Positioning Tool, Product Family No. H44165.
Model L Expansion Joint with

Model A Positioning Tool
132
EXPANSION JOINTS Baker Oil Tools
MODEL LEEJ™ FEATURES/BENEFITS

• Rotational lock in any position to
EXPANSION JOINT
transmit torque when required
(splined version only)
NON-SPLINED • Tool can be pinned at 1 ft intervals
Product Family No. H44167 from closed to fully stroked posi-
tion (splined version only)
SPLINED • Shear value can be adjusted by
Product Family No. H44168 varying the number of shear
screws (splined version only)
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION • Premium V-Ryte seal stack pro-
Both the Non-Splined and Splined vided as standard
versions of the Baker Model LEEJ • 10 ft stroke standard (both non-
Expansion Joint, Product Family splined and splined versions).
Nos. H44167 and H44168, are de- Both versions can be supplied
signed for use above packers in with non-standard stroke lengths
well completions to compensate for as an additional option
tubing movement during treating • ID compatible with tubing ID
and/or injecting operations. • Standard New VAM pin connec-
tion down (with crossover to
When rotation through the tool is re-
required customer thread, if differ-
quired, the design of the splined
ent, as an additional option). Box
version of the LEEJ allows torque to
connection up to customer’s
be applied through the tool in any
specification
position, i.e., it does not have to be
• Standard base material AISI 4130
fully extended or fully collapsed for
carbon steel (both non-splined
rotation through the tool.
and splined versions). Both ver-
The non-splined version does not sions can be supplied in other
permit the transmittal of torque materials as an additional option
through the tool.
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Overall Stroke
Size OD ID
Length Length
in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm ft m
2-3/8 60.3 3.250 82.6 1.929 49.0
148 3759
2-7/8 73.0 3.765 95.6 2.374 60.3 10 3.05
4.300 2.915 158
ACCESSORIES
3-1/2 88.9 109.0 74.0 4013
Baker Model LEEJ Expansion Joint

133
Baker Oil Tools SPACING DEVICES
ADJUSTABLE SPACER SPECIFICATION GUIDE

SUB WITH ROTATIONAL Max Nom
LOCK Size OD ID
in. mm in. mm
Product Family No. H44125 1.900 1.563 39.70
2.531 64.29
The Baker Adjustable Spacer Sub 2-1/16 1.656 42.06
with Rotational Lock is used below a 2-3/8 3.094 78.59 1.969 50.01
dual packer to facilitate making tub- 2-7/8 3.719 94.46 2.375 60.33
ing connections, spacing out, etc., 3-1/2 4.281 108.74 3.000 76.20
between two retrievable packers.
The spacer sub has 24" (609.6 mm)
of travel, and when it has been ad-
justed to the desired length, it is
locked to prevent telescoping or rota-
tional movement.
TELESCOPING
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
SWIVEL SUB
Max Nom
Size OD ID
The Baker Telescoping Swivel Sub in. mm in. mm
was developed for use in multiple 1.315 1.906 48.41 1.000 25.40
string completions as a “union” to fa- 1.660 2.250 57.15 1.313 33.35
cilitate running additional tailpipe be- 1.900 2.531 64.29 1.563 39.70
low a dual string retrievable packer. 2-3/8 3.094 78.59 1.969 50.01
The telescoping action of the sub 2-7/8 3.719 94.46 2.375 60.33
provides 24" (609.6 mm) of travel to 3-1/2 4.281 108.74 3.000 76.20
compensate for inaccuracies in mea- 4-1/2 5.281 134.14 3.938 100.03
surement and to relieve the strain on
threads while making up tailpipe be-
tween two dual packers. The swivel
feature makes it possible to connect
both long and short string tailpipe to
the lower end of the packer even if
the tailpipes are strapped together
and to leave the weight of the tubing
hanging in the slips while making up
the connection between tubing and
packer.
134
MULTI-STRING SEALING ACCESSORIES Baker Oil Tools
PARALLEL HEAD
The Baker Parallel Head Assembly for the Model GT Dual
String Packer is comprised of a scoophead, seal bore re-
ceptacle, and other components needed to modify the
standard pin x pin packer into a short or long string set con-
figuration. This module allows independent running of the
short string above the packer.
The Parallel Head Assembly is typically used in relatively
shallow applications where it is undesirable to run the
strings simultaneously or when dual slips and elevators
are not practical. This module may also be recommended
when retrieval of the short string without releasing the
packer is necessary during the life of the completion.
MODEL S™ SNAP-LATCH
SEAL NIPPLE
The Model S is used to connect the short strings into mul-
tiple-string retrievable packers. The snap-latch provides a
positive surface indication when the nipple snaps into the
sealing bore.
OPTIONS
• Models SA and SD are variations which add increased
length or diameter, Product Family Nos. H70704 and
H70709.
• Model SAM is a mule-shoed version of the SA Seal
Nipple, Product Family No. H70705.
• Model SW provides a locking sleeve that can be shifted
downward preventing it from being pumped out of the Model S Snap-Latch Model K Parallel
seal bore, Product Family No. H70760. Seal Nipple Anchor Seal Nipple
Product Family Product Family
No. H70703 No. H70311
MODEL K™ PARALLEL
ANCHOR SEAL NIPPLE Parallel Head
Product Family
Product Family No. H70311 No. H70032
The Model K is used with the A-5, AL-5 or GT Dual String
ACCESSORIES
Packer to provide a means to anchor the short string seals
into the packer thus eliminating possible pump-out.
SHORT STRING SEAL NIPPLE AVAILABILITY GUIDE

FOR USE WITH HYDROSTATIC AND SNAP-SET DUAL PACKERS
Seal Nipple Size
Product
Model 1.25 1.43 1.53 1.68 1.96 2.06 2.18 2.28 2.39 2.50 2.68 3.00 3.25 3.75
Family No.
S H70703 x x x x x x x x x x x
SA H70704 x x x x x
SAM H70705 x x
SD H70709 x x x x x
K H70311 x x x x x x
SW H70760 x x x
135
Baker Oil Tools MULTI-STRING SEALING ACCESSORIES
SELECTIVE HEAD
The Selective Head was designed for use with
dual string packers to permit the operator to
have either string retrievable, facilitating servic-
ing gas lift valves or other equipment. The Se-
lective Head, attached to the long string, is all
that is required to convert a dual packer for se-
lective retrieval of the long string.
The Selective Head incorporates an “auto-J”.
Set-down weight on the long string engages the
J-Pins of seal nipple, Product Family No.
H70373, in the J-Slot of the Selective Head;
and release is accomplished with right-hand
torque and pick-up of the long string.
ACCESSORY ITEMS
• Model C Selective J-Lock Seal Nipple,
Product Family No. H70373.
Selective Head Model C Selective J-Lock Seat Nipple

SELECTIVE HEAD
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
C Selective J-Lock
Selective Head
Seal Nipple
Max
Short String Seal ID
Size OD Size
Assembly Size
in. in.
45AB 4.490 2.06 1.87 1.562
45C 4.484 2.06 1.87 1.562
2.28
47C 5.922 2.50 1.937
2.68
2.28
47D 6.422 2.50 1.937
2.68
49 7.234 3.25 2.84 2.241
3.25
51 8.312 3.31 2.875
3.75
136
SAFETY JOINTS Baker Oil Tools
SAFETY JOINT SELECTION GUIDE

Rotational Shear Short Long Rotationally
Release Release Stroke Stroke Locked
Safety Joint x
Shear-Out Safety Joint x x
Model B Shear-Out Safety Joint x x
Model C Shear-Out Safety Joint x x x
SAFETY JOINT SPECIFICATION GUIDE

Product Family No. H44101 Max Nom
The Safety Joint provides for emer- Size OD ID
gency disconnect of a portion of the in. mm in. mm
tubing string should it become nec- 1.900 2.22 56.3 1.53 38.8
essary to abandon the equipment 2-3/8 3.094 78.5 2.000 50.8
below. Precision left-hand square 2-7/8 3.719 94.4 2.422 61.5
threads facilitate release of the joint 3-1/2 4.531 115.0 2.984 75.7
by right-hand tubing rotation.
SHEAR-OUT SPECIFICATION GUIDE

SAFETY JOINT Max Nom
Product Family No. H44130 Size OD ID
in. mm in. mm
The Baker Shear-Out Safety Joint is
1.900
used between packers in dual com- 2.510 63.75 1.620 42.42
ACCESSORIES
2-1/16
pletions and in selective completions
2-3/8 2.905 73.79 1.990 50.55
using hydrostatic single string pack-
2-7/8 3.781 96.04 2.313 58.75
ers. When run above the upper pack-
3-1/2 4.531 115.09 2.938 74.63
er in a single string completion,
however, the shear value should be
adjusted to compensate for any hy-
draulic conditions that exist when the
string is landed, or that are created
by well treating operations.
137
Baker Oil Tools SAFETY JOINTS
MODEL B™ SHEAR-OUT
SAFETY JOINT SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Product Family No. H44131 Max Nom
Size OD ID
The Baker Model B Shear-Out Safe-
in. mm in. mm
ty Joint is designed for use between
2-3/8 3.094 78.59 1.929 49.00
a packer and a sand screen to pro-
2-7/8 3.719 94.46 2.438 61.93
vide a means of releasing and re-
3-1/2 3.844 98.55 3.064 77.72
trieving the production string, should
4 4.340 110.24 3.428 87.12
the screen become sanded in. It may
4-1/2 5.031 127.79 3.900 99.03
also be used in any application
7 8.531 216.69 6.250 158.75
where an upstrain type of releasing
device can be used.
MODEL C™ SPECIFICATION GUIDE

ROTATIONALLY LOCKED Max Nom
SHEAR-OUT SAFETY Size OD ID
in. mm in. mm
JOINT
1.900 2.500 63.50 1.620 41.15
Product Family No. H44132 2-3/8 3.063 44.80 2.000 50.80
The Baker Model C Rotationally 2-7/8 3.698 93.93 2.406 61.11
Locked Shear-Out Safety Joint is a 3-1/2 4.500 114.30 2.968 75.39
long-stroke shear release which will 6-5/8 7.375 187.33 5.921 150.39
transmit torque in its closed position.
Specifically designed for use be-
tween packers in dual completions
and in selective completions using
hydrostatic single string packers, it
can be used for any application in
which the shear-type safety joint is
preferred over a rotational-type safe-
ty joint. When run above the upper
packer in a single string completion,
the shear value should be adjusted to
compensate for any hydraulic condi-
tions that exist when the string is
landed or that will be created by well-
treating operations.
138
PARALLEL FLOW SYSTEMS Baker Oil Tools
MODEL A™ FULL MODEL F™ PARALLEL

OPENING PARALLEL LOCATOR SEAL NIPPLE
FLOW TUBE AND Product Family No. H70202
MODEL A™ FULL Used to land the short string in the par-
allel flow tube. Incorporates only one
OPENING ANCHOR seal stack so sufficient tubing weight
PARALLEL FLOW TUBE must be applied to prevent seal move-
ment.
and H70010
MODEL A™ PARALLEL
ANCHOR SEAL NIPPLE
The Model A Full Opening Parallel
Flow Tube is a locator type tubing seal Product Family No. H70301
assembly containing two parallel flow Anchors and seals the short string in
paths. It is used in the upper packer of the parallel flow tube. Used when well
a two packer parallel string installation conditions require that the short string
or in single zone single packer produc- be landed in tension or where insuffi- Product Family
No. H70202
tion with an injection string. It can also cient tubing weight is available to keep
be used in a single packer installation the seals in the seal bore.
with a gas vent string. The long string
side is threaded both up and down,
and the short string side contains a MODEL F™ PARALLEL
seal bore. The head is machined to a SNAP-LATCH SEAL
funnel shape with the axis in line with
the seal bore to guide the parallel seal NIPPLE
nipple into the bore. Since any seal Product Family No. H70701
movement would cause the seal to This seal nipple, when landed in the
leave the bore, sufficient set-down short string side of the flow tube, will
weight must be available to prevent snap past a shoulder in the lower end
movement of the parallel flow tube. of the bore. The snap-latch will hold
The Model A Anchor Parallel Flow sufficiently to allow for a slight upstrain
Tube is intended for the same use as in order to provide an indication that
the locator type parallel flow tube but is the seal nipple is positioned in the seal-
used where well conditions require the ing bore. When used in conjunction
tubing to be landed in tension or where with set-down weight, it provides an
insufficient tubing weight is available to extra measure of safety but does not,
Product Family
prevent movement. however, actually latch the seal nipple No. H70301
to the flow tube. A set-down weight of
2,000 to 4,000 lbs is required to latch
the seal nipple and a 6,000 to 8,000 lbs
ACCESSORIES
pull will remove it from the flow tube.
SEAL NIPPLE SIZE AVAILABILITY GUIDE

Short String Seal Bore
Product
Model Type in.
Family No.
1.25 1.53 1.68 1.96 2.28 2.5
F H70202 Locator x x x
A H70301 Anchor x x x x x
F H70701 Snap-Latch x x x x
Model A Full
Opening Anchor
Parallel Flow Tube
Product Family
No. H70010
Product Family
No. H70701
139
Baker Oil Tools PLUGGING DEVICES
MODEL F™ LATCHING- MODEL DR™ LOCATOR

TYPE PACKER PLUG TYPE PACKER PLUG
The Model F Latching-Type Pack- The Model DR Locator Type Pack-
er Plug can be run on the bottom er Plug is used to convert a Model
of a retrievable squeeze tool such D, DA, F-1, FA-1, HE, HEA, SB-3,
as a retrievable cementer, or it can SAB-3, SABL-3 Retainer Produc-
be run by itself. It converts any tion Packer and a Retrieva-D, Re-
seal bore packer into a temporary trieva-DA Lok-Set and SC-2P
bridge plug and contains a pres- Retrievable Seal Bore Packer that
sure-equalizing feature to facilitate has been previously set, into a
release; however, right-hand rota- temporary bridge plug. It permits
tion is required. the performance of pressuring op-
eration above the packer without
The Model F Lok-Set Retrieving
affecting the zones below. It is at-
Head (Product Family No.
tached with shear screws to a
H67775) is the same as used on
shear sub which is made up on the
the Model G Lok-Set Retrievable
bottom of the work string or a re-
Bridge Plug (Product Family No.
trievable squeeze tool. Set-down
H67734) and is used to run and re-
weight shears the screws and
trieve this type of packer plug.
leaves the plug in the packer. It is
FEATURES/BENEFITS retrieved with a conventional over-
• Equalizing feature enhances shot.
ability to retrieve plug
• Designed to accept standard MODEL DR™
seal stacks
• May be installed in same trip LATCHING-TYPE
when running squeeze tools PACKER PLUG
• Cannot be accidentally released Product Family No. H66503
The Model DR Latching-Type
Packer Plug is used for the same
purpose and in the same way as
the locator type but will hold pres-
sure in both directions. It is run in
the same way but is retrieved by
holding a slight upstrain and turn-
ing to the right 15 turns after en-
gaging with a conventional
overshot.
Model F
Latching-Type Model DR Locator
Packer Plug Type Packer Plug
Product Family Product Family No.
No. H66512 H66501
140
PLUGGING DEVICES Baker Oil Tools
MODEL RS™ stimulation work is completed above the

packer, a standard L-10 Washover Shoe
SETTING NIPPLE is used to engage the setting nipple. The
Product Family No. H66548 removal of the FSG Bypass Blanking
Plug, by conventional wireline methods,
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION provides a full opening completion as-
sembly.
The Model RS Setting Nipple converts a
permanent or retrievable packer into a During workover operations, it is possible
temporary bridge plug that is carried in to remove the setting nipple from the
and set on electric line or drillpipe in a sin- packer by application of right-hand
gle run. The system allows an operator a torque. The system may be re-installed in
method of perforating and stimulating an the packer by replacing the solid nut an-
upper zone while isolating a lower zone. chor with a standard E-22 Anchor. This
The location of the setting nipple pre- assembly is then run in on the end of the
vents the possibility of plugging the pack- production string and latched into the
er tailpipe with gun debris, stimulation packer.
settlings, or fill from upper zones.
FEATURES/BENEFITS
The RS Setting Nipple is comprised of • Field tested system - uses field proven
the seal nipple portion of a Model L-10 components and has performed flaw-
On-Off Connector, a solid nut anchor lessly in field applications
seal assembly and a Model FSG By- • Cost effective - significant cost savings
pass Blanking Plug. The solid nut anchor when compared to conventional meth-
is threaded into the left-hand square ods of zonal isolation that require more
threads in the top of a permanent or re- trips
trievable seal bore packer. The packer • High performance - capable of with-
and nipple assembly is assembled to a standing high pressures during stimu-
Model E-4 Wireline Pressure Setting As- lation operations and high
sembly and run to depth and set. The as- temperatures during production
sembly may also be run on drillpipe, • Versatile - flow wetted components are
tubing or coiled tubing using the Model J available in different metals and elas-
Hydraulic Setting Tool. After remedial or tomers
MODEL B™ AND C™
EXPENDABLE PLUG
Product Family Nos.
H66540 and H66541
The Model B Expendable Plug is
used to convert a retainer produc-
tion packer and a retrievable seal
bore packer into a temporary
ACCESSORIES
bridge plug, thereby permitting
frac, acidizing and/or testing work
above the packer. It is installed in
the packer before running in the
hole. Upon completion of this
work, the Expendable Plug may
be pushed out of the packer with
the production tube, if a Model D
or F-1 Retainer Production Pack-
er is used, or with a sinker bar on
a sandline if a Model DA or FA-1
Retainer Production Packer is
used.
Plug in Place Removing Plug
Model RS Setting Nipple
The Model C Expendable Plug w/Sinker Bar
has been designed to convert a
Model F or FA (bottom setting
type) Retainer Production Packer
into a temporary bridge plug.
141
Baker Oil Tools PLUGGING DEVICES
MODEL E™ SPECIFICATION GUIDE

HYDRO-TRIP SUB Ball Seat ID
Product Family No. H79928 Ball Size Before After
Size
Shifting Shifting
The Model E is used below a hydrau-
in. mm in. mm in. mm
lically actuated tool such as a hy-
1.900 1-7/16 25.4 1.250 31.8 1.516 38.5
draulic set packer to provide a means
1-1/2 38.1 1.375 34.9 1.860 47.2
of applying the required tubing pres- 2-3/8
1-3/4 44.5 1.625 41.3 1.906 48.4
sure for tool activation. The unique
2-7/8 2-1/8 53.0 2.000 50.8 2.375 60.3
sub uses a ball to set and seal on a
2-1/2 63.5 2.312 58.7 2.781 70.6
seat, after the packer is set, in- 3-1/2
2-3/4 69.9 2.500 63.5 2.953 75.0
creased pressure forces the ball seat
3-1/16 77.8 2.734 69.4 3.615 91.8
down until the fingers snap back into 4-1/2
3-3/8 85.7 2.985 75.8 3.865 98.2
a groove. The sub is then full open-
ing, and the ball passes on down the
tubing. Available for use with 1.900 -
4.500" (48.3 mm - 114.3 mm) size
tubing strings.
MODEL C™ TUBING SPECIFICATION GUIDE

TESTING SUB Ball Max Nom
Product Family No. H59921 Size Size OD ID
The Model C Tubing Testing Sub
1-7/16 36.5 1.281 32.5
along with a Bakerlite Ball may be
2-3/8 1-3/4 44.4 3.094 78.5 1.500 38.1
used to test any tubing string. The
1-7/8 47.6 1.781 45.2
sub employs a 45 degree tapered
1-7/16 36.5 1.281 32.5
ball seat machined into the sub itself.
2-7/8 1-3/4 44.4 3.719 94.4 1.500 38.1
The Bakerlite Ball may be reverse-
2-1/8 53.9 1.750 44.4
circulated out of the tubing string af-
3-1/2 2-1/2 63.5 4.531 115.0 2.125 53.9
ter the test. In the event the tubing
4-1/2 3-1/2 88.9 5.594 142.0 3.250 82.5
should be found to be faulty, the ball
can be left in position and the tubing
tested as it is withdrawn from the
well. Available for use with
2-3/8" - 4-1/2" (60.3 mm - 114.3 mm)
size tubing strings.
142 Rev., March, 2002

PLUGGING DEVICES Baker Oil Tools
THE MULTI-CYCLE FULL BORE

TOOL ISOLATION VALVE
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION
The Multi-Cycle Tool (MCT) is pri- The Full Bore Isolation Valve
marily a circulating device that is (FBIV) is a normally closed disc
operated hydraulically from the sur- valve, designed to provide isolation
face using internal tubing pressure. within the tubing string, holding
Run in the hole in the open posi- pressure from both above and be-
tion, the MCT allows the tubing low. The FBIV is cycled open after
string to self-fill. a predetermined number of pres-
sure cycles to allow full-bore ac-
The MCT allows circulation to take
cess through the tailpipe. A Multi-
place in order to combat well con-
Cycle Tool (MCT) is available as a
trol problems, and also to spot light-
companion product that permits
er fluid to create an underbalanced
auto-fill and pressure testing of the
condition. The MCT will lock closed
tubing string while running the as-
after up to four pressure cycles
sembly in the well.
FEATURES/BENEFITS The valve is mechanical and non-
• The number of open ports for cir- destructive; it provides a reliable
culation can be varied from 1 to and easily redressible barrier for
6. A circulation rate of 1-2 barrels extended well test, temporary sus-
per minute (bpm) can be pension barrier, and completion
achieved for each open port, giv- work.
ing a maximum circulation rate of
8 bpm FEATURES/BENEFITS
• The MCT may be equipped with • Reliable Metal Barrier - The FBIV
an external line which can divert has a solid metal barrier that can
The Multi-Cycle Tool
pressure from the tubing to an hold pressure from above and Product Family
below. This barrier is opened No. H67113
externally activated device such
as a packer, Tubing Conveyed non-destructively ensuring reli-
Perforating (TCP) guns or any able and predictable opening
other hydraulically operated tool • Versatility - Suitable for many
• The MCT has 4 circulating cycles completion applications includ-
as standard before lock closed ing temporary abandonment.
• This allows multiple pressure Suitable for extended well test
work with very low redress costs
ACCESSORIES
tests to be conducted prior to
packer setting • Ease of Use - Valve opens on the
• May be used as a modular sys- bleed off cycle with instant full
tem with the full bore isolation bore access - no waiting, no
valve where a barrier is required debris. No additional surface
equipment required
• Pressure Testing - The standard
FBIV provides up to 12 pressure
testing cycles. With the MCT
pressure testing before setting
the packer is possible
• Modular System - The FBIV may
be used with or without the Multi-
Cycle Tool, which permits self-fill-
ing of the tubing and the facility to Full Bore
Isolation Valve
set packers externally Product Family
No. H67114

144
Baker Oil Tools

THE MULTI-CYCLE TOOL, PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H67113
SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Tool Tool Working
Tool Temperature Length
ID OD Pressure
Size
in. mm in. mm psi bar ºF ºC in. mm
451 x 275 2.750 70 4.510 115 6,000 414 57 1,448
587 x 375 3.750 95 5.875 146 5,000 345 55 1,397
5,000 345
801 x 500 5.000 127 8.010 203
8,000 552 300 150
62 1,575
833 x 575 5.750 146 8.330 212
5,000 345
838 x 587 5.875 149 8.380 213
938 x 600 6.000 152 9.380 238 8,000 552 66 1676
FULL BORE ISOLATION VALVE, PRODUCT FAMILY NO. H67114

SPECIFICATION GUIDE
Tool Tool Working Working
Tool Temperature Length
ID OD Pressure Above Pressure Below !
Size
in. mm in. mm psi bar psi bar ºF ºC in. mm
380 x 206 2.060 52 3.800 97 5,000 345 103 2,616
451 x 275 2.750 70 4.510 115 6,000 414 99 2,514
587 x 375 3.750 95 5.875 149 5,000 345 112 2,845
5,000 345
801 x 500 5.000 127 8.010 203 3,000 207 300 150 133 3,378
8,000 552
833 x 575 5.750 146 8.330 212 5,000 345
141 3,581
838 x 587 5.875 149 8.380 213 7,500 517
938 x 600 6.000 152 9.380 238 8,000 552 137 3,480
! If working pressure from below exceeds stated rating, contact Packers AEG.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL RELEASE TOOL
PLUGGING DEVICES
Tool O/D Fingers Retracted Tool O/D Fingers Deployed Maximum Length
Size !
2.060 1.900 48 2.220 56 29.58 752.00
2.750 2.650 67 2.920 74 28.58 726.00
3.750 3.410 87 3.950 100 26.47 672.00
5.210
5.000 132
5.750 5.920 150
4.210 107 36.00 914.00
5.875 6.045 154
6.000 6.250 159
! There must be no restrictions above the FBIV, which would prevent running of the contingency Mechanical Release Tool
UNLOADERS Baker Oil Tools
SPECIFICATION GUIDE MODEL U-1™ UPSTRAIN

Max Tensile Load UNLOADING SUB
Max Min
OD ID Set Retrieving Product Family No. H67510
Size
Position Position
in. mm in. mm lb daN lb daN The Model U-1 Upstrain Unloading
2-3/8 3.765 95.6 1.935 49.1 30,000 13344 30,000 13344 Sub is designed to be used as a tub-
2-7/8 4.516 114.7 2.375 60.3 80,000 35584 60,000 26688
3-1/2 5.281 134.1 3.000 76.2 120,000 53376 60,000 26688
ing drain in a well in which the tubing
can be held in tension. The tool can
be opened and closed without pulling
the tubing. The sub is shear pinned in
the open position, and closed and re-
mains closed with applied tension.
The sub can be locked in an open po-
sition for retrieval of the completion.
SPECIFICATION GUIDE MODEL S™

Ball Max Nom UNLOADING SUB
Size Size OD ID Product Family No. H67111
The Model S Unloading Sub pro-
1-7/16 36.5 1.281 32.5
vides a means of equalizing the tub-
2-3/8 1-3/4 44.4 3.094 78.5 1.500 38.1
ing and annulus pressures. It is
1-7/8 47.6 1.781 45.2
designed for use above a compres-
1-7/16 36.5 1.281 32.5
sion set packer. This accessory is a
2-7/8 1-3/4 44.4 3.719 94.4 1.500 38.1
simple but effective device that uses
2-1/8 53.9 1.750 44.4
ACCESSORIES
shear screws to hold the sub in either
3-1/2 2-1/2 63.5 4.531 115.0 2.125 53.9
the open or closed position. Set-
4-1/2 3-1/2 88.9 5.594 142.0 3.250 82.5
down weight is needed to close the
unloader, or if it is run closed, up-
strain is required to open it.
145
Baker Oil Tools PACKER EXTENSIONS
MODEL B™ GUIDE
The Model B Guide is an integral part of most permanent seal bore and retrievable seal
bore packers. The B Guide is used to connect the packer to tailpipe, millout extensions,
or other equipment mounted below the packer. Commonly B Guides are ordered sep-
arately for clients interested in maximizing inventory flexibility.
MILLOUT EXTENSION
A Millout Extension can be run directly below a seal bore packer when a Seal Bore Ex-
tension or other tailpipe is run below the packer. For permanent packers, the Millout Ex-
tension is required to accommodate the mandrel and catch sleeve of the Baker Model
CJ Packer Milling Tool during packer milling. In the case of a retrievable seal bore pack-
er, the Millout Extension will accommodate the mandrel and catch sleeve of the retriev-
ing tool.
SEAL BORE EXTENSION

Seal Bore Extensions can be run below a seal bore packer.
A Seal Bore Extension is run to provide additional sealing bore when a long seal as-
sembly is run to accommodate considerable tubing movement. The Seal Bore Exten-
sion has the same ID as the corresponding packer seal bore it is run with, thus all
seals of a long seal assembly seal off in the Seal Bore Extension.
Normally a Millout Extension is run above the Seal Bore Extension to permit milling
over the Packer with a standard Model CJ Packer Milling Tool.
If extreme tubing movement is anticipated, it is advisable to incorporate some blank
sections in the seal assembly to minimize the friction of the seals inside the Seal Bore
Extension.
146
PRODUCTION STRING ACCESSORIES Baker Oil Tools
BLAST JOINT
The Baker Blast Joint, positioned opposite the perforations in the casing, is used
in the tubing string of a flowing well to protect it from the abrasive action of the
flowing well. It exposes the maximum of metal in the abrasive area, maintaining
at the same time API tubing ID and coupling OD. It is available in 10' (3.05 m) or
20' (6.10 m) lengths and for use with 2-3/8" (60.3 mm) through 4-1/2" (114.3 mm)
production strings.
PERFORATED SPACER TUBE

The Baker Perforated Spacer Tube is used at the end of a tubing string to provide
an alternate flow path in cases where wireline measuring devices are used.
FLOW COUPLING
ACCESSORIES
The Baker Flow Coupling is used to protect the integrity of tubing from erosive tur-
bulence. Flow Couplings are often used above and below a geometric restriction
in the flow path, depending on the well conditions. API Recommended Practices
14B advises use of Flow Couplings above and below safety valves. Baker Oil
Tools offers Flow Couplings in 4' (1.22 m), 6' (1.83 m), 8' (2.45 m), and 10'
(3.05 m) lengths to suit the application.
147
Baker Oil Tools PRODUCTION STRING ACCESSORIES
WIRELINE ENTRY GUIDE seat, are pumped out of the tool. After the plug or ball
seat have been pumped out, these subs allow unre-
WITH PUMP OUT PLUG, stricted access from the tubing into the casing below
WITH SHEAR-OUT BALL SEAT, AND the tubing string.
WITH SHEAR-OUT BALL SEAT SUB These products are available in a variety of configura-
Product Family Nos. H46921 and H79927 tions. Options include a muleshoe guide to facilitate
easy entry when running the tubing through the top of
DESCRIPTION/APPLICATION a liner or into a seal bore packer, and expendable
The Baker Wireline Entry Guide is designed to be run check valves. The Shear-Out Ball Seat Sub (Product
on the bottom of the tubing string. It will aid wireline Family No. H79927) is furnished in a box x pin config-
tools re-entry into the tubing. uration for those applications where it is necessary to
run additional tubing or completion equipment below
The Wireline Entry Guide with Pump Out Plug, Wire- the Shear-Out Ball Seat Sub.
line Entry Guide with Shear-Out Ball Seat, and the
Shear-Out Ball Seat Sub are installed on the bottom Since each of these tools expend a plug or ball and
end of the tubing to allow the tubing string to be pres- ball seat during their operation, it is necessary to en-
sured. When the differential pressure at the tool sure those parts will safely pass through all equip-
reaches a pre-determined value, the plug, or ball and ment that is located below them.
Wireline Entry Guide Wireline Entry Guide Wireline Entry Guide

Product Family No. H46921 with Pump Out Plug with Shear-Out Ball Seat Sub
148
INTERVENTIONLESS COMPLETION TECHNOLOGY Baker Oil Tools
MODEL STRIKER™ INTERVENTIONLESS

PACKER SETTING SYSTEM
Product Family Nos. H40933, H43717, and H78465
The Striker™ Force Generator is premium product for interventionless ac-
tuation of completion packers in deviated, deepwater and extended reach
wells. The Striker Force Generator is a modular device that generates
packer setting force from hydrostatic well pressure. It is a direct develop-
ment of the innovative and successful Model SB-3H™ Hydrostatic/
SB-3
Hydraulic Retainer Production Packer. The Striker module is configured
for standard hydraulic-set S Series Permanent Packers and Premier
retrievable packers.
The Striker Force Generator may also be remotely activated by Edge™
pressure-pulse telemetry by the addition of an enhanced Edge trigger
module. The Edge trigger module features enhanced Edge technology
including updated temperature ratings, diagnostic capabilities, electronics,
and software.
The Striker Interventionless Packer Setting System features a fully redun-
dant secondary setting mechanism that is actuated by conventional meth-
ods. Therefore, absolute well pressure, pressure pulse telemetry, or
conventional hydraulic methods may be used to set a packer.
FEATURES/BENEFITS
• Eliminates wireline, slick-line and coiled tubing interventions and
associated risk
• Significant reduction in rig-time during setting operations
• Based on field-proven SB-3H Packer
• Enhanced Edge module features all new battery, boards, actuator,
transduction, and telemetry technologies STRIKER
• Simple, robust design

• Proven primary setting mechanism
• Proven fully-independent secondary setting mechanism
• Most substantial interventionless run history in the industry
EDGE ACCESSORIES
.Model Striker™ Interventionless

Packer Setting System
Product Family Nos. H40933, H43717,
and H78465
Rev., April, 2003 149

Baker Oil Tools SPD PRODUCTS
FORMULA B™ TUBING SEAL GREASE

Baker Formula B Tubing Seal Grease is a special-purpose grease used
to protect seal nipples, packer plugs, and other similar accessories. It re-
tains its composition under even the most adverse temperature and
chemical conditions and remains in place during the running-in operation
and when entering the packer bore.
Tubing Seal Grease should be applied to the seal areas of packer acces-
sories to fill the spaces between the accessory and the packer bore to
keep out particles that might interfere with the seal or with removal of the
accessory.
BAKERSEAL THREAD SEALING COMPOUND

Bakerseal Thread Sealing Compound not only seals threaded connec-
tions on new pipe, but also has superior sealing characteristics when
used on worn or damaged threads.
Bakerseal seals saturated steam at 575°F (302°C), which is nearly twice
the API temperature required for a thread sealing compound.
Bakerseal No Lead/No Zinc thread compound was developed as a spe-
cial duty Teflon lubricating compound for casing and tubing threads. Lead
and Zinc were removed in order to provide a “Metal Free” thread com-
pound mandated by current industrial environmental safety standards.
Bakerseal No Lead meets or exceeds performance requirements of API
Bulletin 5A-2.
BAKER MODIFIED
No Lead/No Zinc
Baker Modified No Lead/No Zinc is a high pressure, high temperature
thread sealing compound that combines excellent lubricity, sealing, and
rust inhibition and provides all weather thread protections. It is recom-
mended for casing, tubing, and line pipe threads.
BAKER MODIFIED METAL FREE

Baker Modified Metal Free is a high pressure, high temperature thread
sealing compound that combines excellent lubricity, sealing, and rust in-
hibition and provides all weather thread protection. It is recommended for
casing, tubing, and line pipe threads. Baker Modified Metal Free is proven
absolutely non-toxic to Aquatic life and is not water soluble so it will not
affect water quality. It contains no components which would necessitate
reporting if a spill occurs.
BAKERLOK™ THREAD-LOCKING COMPOUND

Baker Thread-Locking Compound replaces welding for locking casing
joints on the bottom lengths to prevent unscrewing while drilling-out ce-
ment. Welding of shoes, couplings, and collars to casing often weakens
the casing and should be avoided wherever possible.
150
Baker Oil Tools Region/Area Locations
Western Hemisphere Operations Eastern Hemisphere Operations

North America
California/Alaska Region Rocky Mountain Region Asia Region Mid East Region
Baker Oil Tools Baker Oil Tools Baker Oil Tools Baker Eastern S.A.
4230 Foster Avenue 1675 Broadway 1-5 Bell Street P. O. Box 1673
Bakers¿eld, Suite 1500 Canning Vale W. A. Dubai, U.A.E.
CA 93308-4559 Denver, CO 80202 6155 Australia Tel: (971) 4-8836322
Tel: 661/327-7201 Tel: 303/595-3675 Tel: (618) 9-455-0155 Fax: (971) 4-8837132
Fax: 661/324-5296 Fax: 303/595-0635 Fax: (618) 9-455-7928
Canada Region Alaska Area Central Europe/Africa United Kingdom Region

Baker Oil Tools Baker Oil Tools Baker Oil Tools Baker Oil Tools
1300 401 9th Ave SW 4730 Business Park Blvd. Ground Floor Kirkhill Road
Calgary, Alberta Suite 44 Monarch House Kirkhill Industrial Estate
Canada T2P3C5 Anchorage, AK 99503 Eversley Way, Egham Dyce, Aberdeen AB21 OGQ
Tel: 403/537-3400 Tel: 907/273-5100 Surrey TW20 8RY Scotland
Fax: 403/537-3789 Fax: 907/563-0385 Tel: (44) 1784-477 050 Tel: (44) 1224-223500
Fax: (44) 1784-220 100 Fax: (44) 1224-771575
Gulf Coast Region West Texas Region
Scandinavia Region
Baker Oil Tools Baker Oil Tools
1010 Rankin Road P. O. Box 61347 (mail) Baker Oil Tools
Third Floor Midland, TX 79711 Tanangervegen 501
Houston, TX 77073 10912 Highway 80 East 4056 Tananger, Norway
Tel: 713/625-6800 Odessa, TX 79765 Tel: (47) 51-717000
Fax: 713/625-6806 Tel: 915/563-7979 Fax: (47) 51-717010
Fax: 915/561-8303
Mid-Continent & MALT Region

North East Region (MS, AR, LA, TX)
5600 N. May Avenue 3600 Old Bullard Rd.
Suite 200 Suite 403
Oklahoma City, OK 73112 Tyler, TX 75701
Tel: 405/842-4005 Tel: 903/509-9056
Fax: 405/842-1882 Fax: 903/509-9060
Latin America World Headquarters

South America/Mexico
9100 Emmott Road (77040) 9100 Emmott Road (77040)
P.O. Box 40129 P.O. Box 40129
Houston, TX 77240-0129 Houston, TX 77240-0129
Tel: 713/466-1322 Tel: 713/466-1322
Fax: 713/856-3827 Fax: 713/466-2502
www.bakerhughes.com/bot/
A¡ as® is a registered trademark of Asahi Glass Company, Ltd.; Viton®, Te¡ on®, Kalrez® are registered trademarks of E. I. Dupont;
RytonTM is a registered trademark of Phillips; Microsoft® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
TM®© Copyright 2000 Baker Hughes Incorporated. All rights reserved. • Pub. No. 20002663-30M-09/00

Catalog Baker

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalog Baker

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

D E L I V E R I N G

Baker Oil Tools

Product Description Page Product Description Page

H41518 TorqueMaster™ Packer, Anchor, H44387 Model Snap-In/Snap-Out, Set Down

Product Description Page Product Description Page

H45750 Blast Joint..................................................... 147 H64687 Model SC-2PAH™ Packer ............................. 86

Product Description Page Product Description Page

COMPLETION DESIGN / ORDERING INFORMATION

ELASTOMER SELECTION Viton and have to be protected with a containment

Pressure Differential Temp. Environmental Compatibility !

Baker Oil Tools

Fluid Weights (lbs/gal) Tubing Annulus

DEVIATED WELL CRA TUBING Coefficient

Fluid Weights (lbs/gal) Tubing Annulus

ADD ADDITIONAL RUNS AS NECESSARY

Well Environment Data For Date:

Customer: Well Location/Name:

Well Type: $ Gas $ Oil $ Injection/Disposal! $

Casing OD: Casing Wt: Casing Grade: / $

Reservoir Depth: (ft, m)

Production Inhib: (continuous, batch, none) Inhibitor type: (e.g., amine)

PACKER PERFORMANCE DEFINITION

The system, known as PER- Safe

permanent and retrievable pack- Area

PRODUCTION AND INJECTION

ity. An on/off tubing seal connector will often be

FRACTURING REQUIRING ZONE

BOTTOM NO-GO TUBING NIPPLE

WIRELINE ENTRY GUIDE

SEAL BORE PACKER COMPLETION

TOP NO-GO NIPPLE

BOTTOM NO-GO NIPPLE

WIRELINE ENTRY GUIDE

SEAL BORE PACKER /

ONE TRIP COMPLETION

MONOBORE POLISHED BORE RECEPTACLE

either run in place or deployed on electric line, slickline, or

NORTH SEA STANDARD

Extension. These items form the core of the system, with

MULTIPLE ZONE PLUG-BACK

TOP NO-GO TUBING NIPPLE

WIRELINE ENTRY GUIDE

BOTTOM NO-GO TUBING NIPPLE

WIRELINE ENTRY GUIDE

ing permanent or retrievable seal bore packers and G-22 LOCATOR

packers is one method which allows perforating and

CMD SLIDING SLEEVE

G-22 LOCATOR SEAL ASSEMBLY

SEAL BORE EXTENSION

CMD SLIDING SLEEVE

G-22 LOCATOR SEAL ASSEMBLY

SEAL BORE EXTENSION

BOTTOM NO-GO NIPPLE

WIRELINE ENTRY GUIDE

ONE TRIP SINGLE STRING

CMD SLIDING SLEEVE

HS SINGLE STRING RETRIEVABLE

CMD SLIDING SLEEVE

HS SINGLE STRING RETRIEVABLE

BOTTOM NO-GO NIPPLE

WIRELINE ENTRY GUIDE

HIGH PRESSURE DUAL

G-22 LOCATOR SEAL ASSEMBLY

BOTTOM NO-GO TUBING NIPPLE